2011 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Performance and
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-26
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-38
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-43
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
iii
owner manual. Please refer to the
purchase documentation relating
to your specific vehicle to confirm
each of the features found on your
vehicle. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Manufactured under license
under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol
are registered trademarks and
DTS Digital Surround and the DTS
logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software.
All Rights Reserved.
The names, logos, emblems,
slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath,
CTS, and CTS-V are trademarks
and/or service marks of General
Motors LLC, its subsidiaries,
affiliates, or licensors.
Music recognition technology
and related data are provided
by Gracenote®. Gracenote is
the industry standard in music
recognition technology and
related content delivery.
This manual describes features
that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle either because
they are options that you did not
purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25974555 B Second Printing
© 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Introduction
iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information
about the vehicle, use the Index
in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are registered
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès du
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
suivante:
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
“Made for iPod,” means that
an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically
to iPod and has been certified
by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is
not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
1-800-551-4123
Numéro de poste 6438 de
langue française
www.helminc.com
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
v
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Symbols
WARNING
{
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
The vehicle has components and
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage. This
would not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Introduction
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
( : Heated Steering Wheel
j : LATCH System Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-1
Sensing System for
Rear Vision
In Brief
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20
Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-21
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Universal Remote System . . . 1-21
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Heated and Ventilated
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Head Restraint
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Steering Wheel Controls
(Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.
I. Clock on page 5‑8.
P. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 5‑27.
J. Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37.
Heated Steering Wheel on
page 5‑4 (If Equipped).
C. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
K. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6‑4.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Disable Button (CTS-V Model
Only). See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑38.
D. Turn and Lane-Change Signals
on page 6‑4.
L. Navigation Display Brightness
Control (If Equipped). See
Navigation System Manual.
Q. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).
Located on the rear of the
steering wheel. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑29.
E. Instrument Cluster on
page 5‑11.
M. Infotainment on page 7‑1.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
Navigation/Radio System
(If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.
R. Data Link Connector (DLC)
(Out of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
N. Parking Brake Release Lever.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
G. Navigation Button (If Equipped).
See Navigation System Manual.
S. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
page 5‑2.
H. Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑38.
T. Horn on page 5‑4.
O. Hood Release. See Hood on
page 10‑5.
U. Steering Wheel Controls (Audio)
on page 5‑3.
Magnetic Ride Control on
page 9‑40 (CTS‐V Model Only).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
In Brief
V. Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑12.
Starting the Engine
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
When first starting the vehicle, the
engine idle speed will be elevated
to allow the catalytic converter, an
emissions control device, to quickly
reach operating temperature. After
approximately 20 seconds, the
engine will begin to transition to
it's normal, quieter idle speed,
which can vary depending on
the temperature. This is normal
operation.
W. Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
X. Parking Brake Button. See
Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Y. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑26 or
Manual Transmission on
page 9‑31.
Z. Instrument Panel Storage on
page 4‑1.
Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
AA. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-5
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
Press and hold V to open the
trunk/liftgate.
Press L and release to locate the
The keyless access transmitter is
used to lock and unlock the doors
from up to 60 m (195 feet) away
from the vehicle.
vehicle.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic
alarm.
For keyless access vehicles, press
the button (A) to remove the key.
The key can be used for all locks.
Keyless Access
Press K to unlock the driver door.
Press again within five seconds to
unlock all remaining doors.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7.
Press Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can
be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
Key Access
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
In Brief
.
From the outside turn the key
toward the front or rear of the
vehicle (Sedan and Wagon),
Canceling a Remote Start
Remote Vehicle Start
For vehicles with this feature, the
engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start:
.
Aim the RKE transmitter
or press the Q or K button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation
(Key Access) on page 2‑5 or
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7.
at the vehicle and press and
hold / until the parking lamps
turn off.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entry
transmitter at the vehicle.
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Press Q.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
3. Immediately after completing
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑12.
Power Door Locks
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about 4 seconds if the vehicle is
not in view.
Power door lock controls are
located on the front doors.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock a door manually:
K : Press to unlock the doors.
Q : Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑17.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
.
From the inside, use the door
lock knob on the window sill
for the rear doors (Sedan and
Wagon).
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-7
Manual Operation of the Power
Liftgate
Liftgate
Windows
Power Liftgate
With the vehicle in P (Park), turn
the liftgate mode switch to OFF
and unlock the doors. Press the
touchpad under the liftgate handle
and pull up on the handle. To close
the liftgate, pull down on the pull
cup. See Liftgate (Wagon) on
page 2‑21.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
operate the power liftgate.
To open the liftgate using the
button on the driver door, select the
mode then press the center of the
button. See Liftgate (Wagon) on
page 2‑21 for more information on
programming the height opening
settings.
Trunk Release
To open the liftgate with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter,
The trunk may be opened by
pressing the remote trunk release
button located on the lower portion
Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagon
and Coupe Similar
press and hold & on the RKE
of the driver door, V on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, or the trunk release
button located on the rear of the
trunk above the license plate. See
Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19
for more information.
The power window switches are on
the driver door. Each passenger
door has a switch that controls only
that window.
transmitter.
To open the liftgate from outside the
vehicle, press the touchpad on the
outside liftgate handle.
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
For more information, see Power
Windows on page 2‑30.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
In Brief
.
Raise or lower the entire seat
by moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.
To adjust the lumbar support,
if equipped:
Seat Adjustment
Power Seats
.
Press and hold the top of
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑5 for more information.
control (B) to increase support
to the top of the seatback and
decrease support to the bottom
of the seatback.
Seat Position
Use the vertical control to adjust the
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks
on page 3‑8 for more information.
.
.
Press and hold the bottom of the
control (B) to decrease support
to the top of the seatback and
increase support to the bottom
of the seatback.
Power Lumbar
Press and hold the front or rear
of the control (B) to increase or
decrease support to the entire
seatback.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑7 for more information.
To adjust the seat:
.
Move the seat forward or
Side Bolster
rearward by moving the
horizontal control forward or
rearward.
To adjust the side bolster support,
if equipped:
A. Side Bolster Control
.
.
Raise or lower the front or rear
Press the top or bottom of
B. Lumbar Support Control
C. Seatback Bolster Control
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
horizontal control up or down.
control (A) to increase or
decrease support in seat
cushion bolsters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-9
.
Press the top or bottom of
control (C) to increase or
decrease support in the
seatback bolsters.
column position, if the vehicle is
equipped with the power tilt and
telescopic steering column.
sound when the button is pressed.
The seat, outside mirrors, and/or
power steering column will move to
the position previously stored for the
identified driver.
1: Saves and recalls for driver 1.
2: Saves and recalls for driver 2.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3‑7 for more information.
If entry/exit recall is programmed on
in the vehicle personalization menu,
automatic entry recall occurs when
the ignition is turned on.
B : Moves the driver seat and/or
power steering column to the exit
position. See “Exit Recall” later in
this section for more information.
Memory Features
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors and
Steering Column” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside
mirrors, and the power steering
column, if equipped, to the
desired driving positions.
Exit Recall
B : Press to move the driver
seat and/or power steering column,
if equipped, to the exit position.
A single beep sounds when the exit
feature activates. The vehicle must
be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission, or the parking brake
must be applied for a manual
transmission.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
3. Repeat for a second driver
using “2”.
On vehicles with the memory
To recall memory positions, press
and release “1” or “2”. The vehicle
must be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission, or the parking brake
must be applied for a manual
package, memory buttons 1 and 2
on the driver door are used to save
and recall memory settings for the
driver seat cushion and seatback,
outside mirrors, and the steering
transmission. A single beep will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
In Brief
If entry/exit recall is programmed on
in the vehicle personalization menu,
automatic seat and/or steering
column movement occurs under the
following conditions:
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
Heated and Ventilated
Seats
.
The ignition key is removed on
vehicles with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE).
For more information, see Heated
and Ventilated Front Seats on
page 3‑12.
.
The ignition is turned to OFF
and the driver door is opened on
vehicles with Remote Keyless
Access.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
If entry/exit recall is programmed
off and the exit button is pressed,
the driver seat will move back a
preset distance and the steering
column, if equipped, will move
up and forward. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
If available, the controls are on the
climate control panel.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the
head restraint height in the proper
position.
Press z to heat the seat and
seatback or { to ventilate the seat.
A light bar in the climate control
display shows the setting.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-11
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
and the roof‐rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 5‑18 for
more information.
Safety Belts
Sensing System for
Passenger Airbag
The passenger airbag status
indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle
is started.
United States
Refer to the following sections for
important information on how to use
safety belts properly.
Canada and Mexico
.
Safety Belts on page 3‑14.
The passenger sensing system
will turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver airbag,
.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly on page 3‑18.
.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑24.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
In Brief
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Mirror Adjustment
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Exterior
4. Press either } or | again to
deselect the mirror.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑28.
Interior
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of headlamps from behind
you. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever down.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are on the driver door.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 2‑29.
To adjust each mirrors:
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
1. Press } or | to select the
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
Exterior Lighting
1-13
Power Tilt Wheel
Interior Lighting
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on
the overhead console. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
For manual operation, press the
button next to each lamp to turn it
on or off.
The exterior lamp control is located
toward the end of the turn signal/
lane change lever.
If the reading lamps are left on, they
automatically shut off 10 minutes
after the ignition has been
turned off.
O : Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior
lamps.
For vehicles with the power tilt
wheel, the control is on the left side
of the steering column.
For more information, see:
The exterior lamp control has
four positions:
.
Reading Lamps on page 6‑5.
.
Push the control up or down
.
O : Turns off all lamps, except the
Instrument Panel Illumination
to tilt the steering wheel up
or down.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Control on page 6‑5.
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
and off automatically, depending
upon how much light is available
outside of the vehicle.
.
Push the control forward or
rearward to move the steering
wheel toward the front or rear of
the vehicle.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
In Brief
& : For a delayed wiping cycle.
Turn the adjustable interval wiper
band to set the frequency of wipes.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, and
instrument panel lights.
6 : Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
together with parking lamps,
sidemarker lamps, taillamps,
license plate lamps, and instrument
panel lights.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
Windshield Washer
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on
WARNING
{
Sedan and Coupe Model shown
page 6‑1.
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑3.
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
Wagon Model shown
Sedan and Coupe Model
Move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
K : Press the button with
this symbol, on the end of the
windshield washer lever, to wash
the windshield. The washer fluid
sprays onto the windshield and the
7 : Single wipe, briefly move
the lever down and release.
Several wipes, hold the lever down.
T : Turns the wipers off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-15
wipers run for a few cycles to
clear the windshield. Press and
hold K for more wash cycles.
Wagon Model
Pull the lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield. The
spray continues until the lever is
released. The wipers will run a
few times.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4 and Rear Window Wiper/
Washer on page 5‑6 (if equipped).
A. Display
B. Fan
H. Temperature and Heated/
Ventilated Seat
Climate Controls
The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled
with this system.
I. Air Conditioning
J. Recirculation
C. Power
D. AUTO
K. Outside Air
E. PASS (Passenger Climate
Control)
L. Rear Window Defogger
F. Defrost
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
G. Air Delivery Mode
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
In Brief
Storing a Favorite Station
Transmission
Vehicle Features
A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the
six softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs on the display and
by using the radio favorites page
button (FAV button). Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each
page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
Automatic Transmission
Radio(s)
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or Tap
Shift
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows
shifting an automatic transmission
similar to a manual transmission.
DSC can be enabled through the
shift lever or the Tap Shift controls,
located on the back of the steering
wheel (if equipped). See Manual
Mode on page 9‑29.
FM/AM: Press to select between
FM or AM.
m : Press to select XM™,
if equipped.
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select radio
stations.
For more information, see AM-FM
Radio on page 7‑9.
Manual Transmission
¨ SEEK/ © SEEK: Press to seek
the next or previous station.
Skip Shift (CTS‐V)
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.
Under light acceleration, the
transmission will only allow shifting
from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). This
helps improve fuel mileage.
Under harder acceleration, Skip
Shift is disabled, and all gears are
available. See Manual Transmission
on page 9‑31.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation on page 7‑2.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-17
Setting the Clock
Satellite Radio
Portable Audio Devices
The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock:
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
auxiliary input and a USB port
located in the center console.
External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
changers, and USB storage devices
may be connected, depending on
the audio system.
XM Satellite Radio Service
1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock face.
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
2. Push and hold the right
adjustment button to move the
clock hands forward, or the left
adjustment button to make the
clock hands go backward.
For more information, see Auxiliary
Devices on page 7‑35.
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio
digital-quality sound. A fee is
required to receive the XM service.
Holding either button down will
cause the clock to advance
faster. Release the button before
the desired time is reached.
For more information refer to:
.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
3. Push and release either button
to adjust the time by one minute
increments until the desired time
is reached.
system, microphone, and controls.
.
www.xmradio.ca or call
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
For more information, see Satellite
Radio on page 7‑12.
For more information on setting the
clock, see Clock on page 5‑8.
See Bluetooth on page 7‑37.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
In Brief
.
.
For vehicles without a navigation
Steering Wheel Controls
(Audio)
y / c z : Press to go to the
previous or next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the previous or next
track of a CD.
Press to interact with the Bluetooth®
system. See Bluetooth on
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, OnStar, or Bluetooth,
page 7‑37 for more information.
press and hold g for
two seconds and say “hands
free” to interact with OnStar or
Bluetooth.
+ e − : Press to increase or to
decrease the volume.
b g : Press and release to silence
the vehicle speakers only. The
audio of the wireless and wired
headphones, if the vehicle has
these features, does not mute.
For more information, see Steering
Wheel Controls (Audio) on
page 5‑3.
Press and release b g again, to
Some audio steering wheel controls
could differ depending on the
vehicle's options. Controls that can
be adjusted at the steering wheel
may include:
turn the sound on.
.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to initiate speech
recognition.
SRCE: Press to switch between
the radio AM, FM, XM (if equipped),
CD, HDD (if equipped), auxiliary
input jack, DVD (if equipped), and
USB (if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-19
Cruise Control
[ : Press to cancel cruise control
without erasing the set speed from
memory.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the
bottom of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems and enables
See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.
Navigation System
access to the personalization menu.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
Navigation System Manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POI), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more.
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
I : Press to turn the system on or
off. The indicator light on the button
turns on when cruise control is on.
The DIC buttons are located on the
instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
+RES : Press to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume to a previously
set speed.
See the Navigation System Manual
for more information.
3 : Press to scroll through the
−SET : Press to set the speed or
trip and fuel displays.
make the vehicle decelerate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
In Brief
.
.
Chime Volume
T : Press to scroll through the
vehicle information displays.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
Memory Settings
For vehicles with this feature, it uses
sensors on the rear bumper to
detect objects while parking the
vehicle. It operates at speeds
less than 8 km/h (5 mph) while
in R (Reverse).
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46.
U : Press to customize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46 for more information.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
V : Press to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC
warning messages and clear them
from the DIC display.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation.
The rear vision camera displays a
view of the area behind the vehicle
on either the navigation screen or
the inside rear view mirror when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Once shifted out of R (Reverse), the
navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed,
after a delay or the video image
automatically disappears from the
inside rear view mirror.
y z : Press to scroll up and down
The system can be disabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
the menu items.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27.
See "Park Assist" under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
Vehicle Customization
Some vehicle features can be
programmed by using the DIC
buttons on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel. These
features include:
To clean the camera lens, located
above the license plate, rinse it with
water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
See, Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
page 9‑44 for more information.
.
Language
.
Door Lock and Unlock Settings
.
Lighting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-21
Storage Compartments
Power Outlets
Universal Remote System
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are three accessory power
outlets. The power outlets located
below the climate control system,
inside the center console storage
bin, and on the rear of the center
console are powered while the
vehicle is in ON/RUN, START or
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until
the driver door is opened within
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
The Universal Home Remote
System allows for garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices to be
programmed to work with these
buttons in the vehicle.
Press the bottom of the load floor
handle assembly to lift the top on
the handle. Pull up on the handle
to open the cargo management
system.
See Universal Remote System on
page 5‑54.
On the CTS Wagon there is an
additional accessory power outlet
located near the rear cargo net that
is powered at all times.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
See Cargo Management System
(Wagon Only) on page 4‑3 for more
information.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
In Brief
Express Open/Express Close:
Press and release the rear or front
of the switch to express open or
express close the sunshade.
Sunroof
Performance and
Maintenance
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP), to operate
the sunroof and power sunshade.
See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 and
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑22.
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system turns on
automatically every time the vehicle
is started.
The sunroof switches are on the
overhead console.
.
The passenger side switch operates
the sunroof.
To turn off traction control,
press and release the t
located on the Instrument panel
(CTS) or the steering wheel
Vent: Press and hold the front of
the switch to vent the sunroof. Press
and hold the rear of the switch to
close the sunroof vent.
(CTS-V). F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑40.
Express Open/Express Close:
For Sedan and Wagon only, press
and release the rear or front of the
switch to express open or express
close the sunroof.
.
Press the button again to turn
traction control back on.
The driver side switch operates the
sunshade.
For more information, see Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑38.
Open/Close: Press the front or
rear of the switch to open or close
the sunshade.
For more information see Sunroof
(Sedan and Wagon) on page 2‑33
or Sunroof (Coupe) on page 2‑34.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-23
StabiliTrak® System
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire
During cooler conditions, the low tire
pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
StabiliTrak assists with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult
driving conditions. The system turns
on automatically every time the
vehicle is started.
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
.
To turn off both traction control
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
and electronic stability control,
press and hold t on the
instrument panel (CTS) or
steering wheel (CTS-V)
The TPMS warning light alerts you
to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑11. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 10‑74.
until F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message is
displayed. See Ride Control
System Messages on page 5‑40.
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. The kit can be used
to temporarily seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire.
.
Press the button again to turn on
both systems.
For more information, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 10‑89 for complete
operating information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
In Brief
.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
If the vehicle came with a jack and
spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑87.
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving
tips to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Engine Oil Life System
Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.
The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle use
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message when it is time
to change the engine oil and filter.
The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil
change.
.
Roadside Service
U.S. or Canada: 1-800-882-1112
Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid
TTY Users (U.S. or Canada):
1-888-889-2438
abrupt stops.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long
Mexico: 01-800-466-0805
periods of time.
As the owner of a new Cadillac, you
are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Service program.
Resetting the Oil Life System
.
When road and weather
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
conditions are appropriate, use
cruise control.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9 for
more information.
.
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
Always follow posted speed
limits or drive more slowly when
conditions require.
.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14.
Keep vehicle tires properly
inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a
single trip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-25
OnStar®
Roadside Service and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
How OnStar Service Works
Q : Push this blue button to
connect to a specially trained
OnStar Advisor to verify your
account information and to answer
questions.
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Service, and relay your
exact location to get the help
you need.
] : Push this red emergency
button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Advisors.
For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range
of safety, security, navigation,
Online Owner Center
(U.S. and Canada)
X : Push this button for hands‐free,
voice‐activated calling and to give
voice commands for Hands‐Free
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
diagnostics, and calling services.
Navigation.
Automatic Crash Response
Automatic Crash Response,
In a crash, built‐in sensors can
automatically alert an OnStar
Advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to see if
you need help.
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn
Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling
are available on most vehicles.
Sign up today at:
www.cadillacownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
In Brief
Not all OnStar services are
OnStar service requires wireless
communication networks and the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
a working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar service may not work if the
OnStar equipment isn’t properly
installed or you haven’t maintained
it and the vehicle is in good working
order and in compliance with all
government regulations. If you
try to add, connect, or modify
any equipment or software in the
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems OnStar can’t
control may prevent service to you,
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather, electrical system design
and architecture of the vehicle,
damage to important parts of the
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone
network congestion or jamming.
available on all vehicles. For more
information, see the OnStar Owner's
Guide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)
or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1‐888‐466‐7827) or
OnStar service can’t work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar
service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle can’t
work unless GPS signals are
available, unobstructed, and
TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push
the Q button to speak with an
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see
the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. The vehicle has to have
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Brief
1-27
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if
the OnStar Advisor cannot be
heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly. Push
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
OnStar Steering Wheel
Controls
the Q button and request a vehicle
diagnostic check. If the light
This vehicle may have
appears clear (no light appears),
your OnStar subscription has
expired and all services have been
a b g / $ i Talk/Mute button
that can be used to interact with
OnStar Hands-Free calling. See
Steering Wheel Controls (Audio) on
page 5‑3 for more information.
deactivated. Push the Q button to
confirm that the OnStar equipment
is active.
On some vehicles, the $ i button
can be used to dial numbers into
voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-28
In Brief
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-1
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Exterior Mirrors
Keys, Doors and
Windows
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-17
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Safety Locks (Sedan and
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Keys and Locks
Doors
Interior Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key
Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) . . . . . . . 2-19
Liftgate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Vehicle Security
Windows
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-25
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Immobilizer Operation (Key
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Keyless
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . 2-12
Door Locks (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Door Locks (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Central Door Unlocking
Roof
Sunroof (Sedan and
Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Sunroof (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keyless
access transmitter in a vehicle
with children.
Keys
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
One of the following keys comes
with the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-3
Key Access
Keyless Access
Keyless Access
This key is used for the driver door,
ignition, and glove box.
This key, located inside the keyless
access transmitter, is used for the
driver door, glove box, and rear seat
pass-through door. See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door” under Trunk
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19 for
more information.
If the vehicle has the Keyless
Access System, the transmitter has
a thin button (A) near the bottom of
the transmitter used to remove the
key. Press (A) and pull the key out.
Do not pull the key out without
pressing the button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
This vehicle may have the Key
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Access System or a Keyless Access
System. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7 for more information. See
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
information on starting the vehicle.
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
.
Check the distance. The
Key Access
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
If the vehicle has the Key Access
System, there is no key in the
transmitter.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
Notice: If the transmitter does not
have a button near the base, do
not pull on the chrome base of
the transmitter. Pulling on the
base of this transmitter could
damage it.
.
Check the transmitter's battery.
See “Battery Replacement” later
in this section.
Contact Roadside Service if you
are locked out of the vehicle.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-5
.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door. If K is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining
doors unlock. The interior lamps
come on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Key Access)
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter works up to 20 m
(65 feet) away.
If enabled through the DIC, the
parking lamps flash twice to indicate
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
V / & (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
Release): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the trunk/
liftgate. The automatic transmission
must be in P (Park) or the manual
transmission must be in Neutral with
the parking brake set.
There are other conditions that can
affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4.
Do not pull on the chrome base of
the transmitter.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the
doors.
If enabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC), the
parking lamps may flash once to
indicate locking has occurred.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The turn signal
lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
The horn may chirp when Q is
pressed again within five seconds.
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46 for additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the panic
alarm. The turn signal lamps
flash and the horn sounds for
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to the vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter
is programmed to the vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also
be programmed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters no longer work once the
new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to
START or L is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
The vehicle comes with
two transmitters. Each transmitter
will have a number on top
of it, “1” or “2”. These numbers
correspond to the driver of the
vehicle. For example, the memory
seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5
and Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46 for more information.
eight transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery In Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery In Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 5‑37
for additional information.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with
a flat, thin object inserted into
the notch, located above the
metal base.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-7
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Keyless Unlocking
Keyless Locking
With the keyless access transmitter
within 1 m (3 feet), approach the
front door and pull the handle to
unlock and open the door. On some
models there is a touch sensor on
the door handle. If the transmitter is
recognized, the door will unlock
and open.
The doors lock after several
seconds if all doors are closed
and at least one keyless access
transmitter has been removed
from the interior of the vehicle. To
customize if the doors automatically
lock upon exiting the vehicle, see
“Keyless Locking” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
(Keyless Access)
The Keyless Access System
transmitter will work up to 60 m
(195 feet) away.
To access the rear doors first, pull
the rear door handle once to unlock
all doors and a second time to open
the door.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Press the trunk release button
located on the trunk above the
license plate to open the trunk if the
keyless access transmitter is within
range. See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe)
on page 2‑19 for additional
information.
The Keyless Access System locks
and unlocks the doors and trunk
without pressing the buttons on the
keyless access transmitter. The
keyless access transmitter must be
within 1 m (3 feet) of the door or
trunk being opened.
Entering any door other than the
driver door will cause all of the
doors to unlock. This is not
customizable.
To customize which doors unlock
when the driver door is opened, see
“Keyless Unlock” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
There are other conditions that
affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4.
To program the vehicle so the turn
signal indicators do not flash and
the horn does not sound when
For vehicles with the memory
feature, press K on the keyless
access transmitter to program and
recall the memory settings. See
“Memory Seat” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
information.
pressing Q on the keyless access
transmitter, see “Remote Door
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
only the driver door. The turn signal
indicators flash twice.
/ (Remote Start): Press to
operate the remote start feature.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑12 for additional information.
Press K twice within five seconds
to unlock all the doors. The interior
lamps may come on.
V / & (Remote Trunk/Liftgate
Release): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the trunk/
liftgate. The automatic transmission
must be in P (Park) or the manual
transmission must be in Neutral with
the parking brake set.
To program the vehicle so the turn
signal indicators do not flash and
the fog lamps and reverse lamps
remain on steady for about
20 seconds when the keyless
access transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle, see “Remote Door
Unlock Feedback” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46.
With Remote Start Shown, Without
Similar
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to
locate the vehicle. The horn sounds
three times and the turn signal
lamps flash three times.
doors. The turn signal indicators
flash. When Q is pressed twice, the
turn signal indicators flash twice,
and the horn sounds once to
confirm locking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-9
The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters no
longer work. Each vehicle can have
up to four transmitters matched to it.
5. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) displays Ready To Learn
Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4.
Press and hold L for
three seconds to sound the
panic alarm. The horn sounds
and the turn signal lamps flash
for 30 seconds. Press and
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
release L again to stop the alarm.
A new transmitter can be
programmed to the vehicle when
there is one recognized transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada,
two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new
transmitter.
The vehicle comes with
two transmitters. Each transmitter
will have a number on top of
it, “1” or “2”. These numbers
correspond to the driver of the
vehicle. For example, the memory
seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter
labeled “1”, if enabled through the
DIC. See “Memory Seat” under
Power Seat Adjustment on page 3‑5
and Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46 for more information.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the recognized
transmitter(s) in the cupholder.
Have the new transmitter
available with you.
6. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket
is inside the center console
storage area located between
the driver and front passenger
seats.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key lock cylinder located on the
outside of the driver door.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters
programmed to the vehicle will work.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
4. Turn the key to the unlock
position five times within
five seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
7. A beep sounds once the
transmitter is programmed.
The DIC displays Ready To
Learn Electronic Key #3 or 4,
or Maximum # Electronic Keys
Learned.
The procedure requires three,
ten minute cycles to complete the
matching process.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the
key lock cylinder located on the
driver door.
1. The vehicle must be off.
4. Turn the key to the unlock
position five times within
five seconds.
8. Press the ignition control knob to
exit programming mode.
5. The DIC displays Press Start
Control To Learn Keys.
9. Remove the transmitter from
the transmitter pocket and
6. Press the ignition switch in.
7. The DIC reads Learn Delay
Active Wait XX Min and counts
down to zero.
press K on the keyless access
transmitter two times.
10. To program additional
transmitters, repeat
8. The DIC displays Press Start
Control To Learn Keys again.
Steps 6 through 9.
9. Press the ignition switch in
again.
Programming without a
Recognized Transmitter
2. Place the new transmitter into
the transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket
is inside the center console
storage area located between
the driver and front passenger
seats.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.
United States owners are permitted
to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized
transmitter is not available. The
Canadian immobilizer standard
requires that Canadian owners see
their dealer for programming new
transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
11. The DIC reads Learn Delay
Active Wait XX Min and counts
down to zero.
12. A beep sounds and the DIC
reads Ready To Learn
Electronic Key # X. All
previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-11
13. A beep sounds once
programming is complete. The
DIC displays Ready To Learn
Electronic Key # 2.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of the
circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the
transmitter.
Replace the battery if the Replace
Battery In Remote Key message
displays in the DIC. See “Replace
Battery In Remote Key” under Key
and Lock Messages on page 5‑37
for additional information.
To program additional
transmitters, insert each
transmitter in the pocket until
a beep is heard and the
DIC advances to the next
electronic key number. Up
to four transmitters can be
programmed. The DIC displays
Maximum # Electronic Keys
Learned and exits the
If the transmitter battery is weak,
the DIC may display Electronic Key
Not Detected when you try to start
the vehicle. To start the vehicle,
place the transmitter in the center
console storage area transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing to the
front of the vehicle. Then, with the
vehicle in P (Park) or Neutral, press
the brake pedal and the ignition
control knob. See Starting the
Engine on page 9‑19, for additional
information about the vehicle's
electronic keyless ignition with push
start. Replace the transmitter battery
as soon as possible.
programming mode.
Press the ignition control knob
to complete the process.
14. Press the ignition control knob
if programming is complete.
1. Separate the transmitter with a
flat, thin object inserted into the
slot on the side or back of the
transmitter.
15. Press K on each newly
programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing down. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
to ON/RUN. See Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on
page 8‑1.
Starting the Engine Using Remote
Start
To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
4. Snap the transmitter back
together.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using remote
start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle
and press Q on the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start
2. Press and hold / for at least
four seconds or until the
This vehicle may have a remote
starting feature that allows you to
start the engine from outside the
vehicle.
regulations for any requirements
on remote starting of vehicles.
vehicle's turn signal lamps flash.
The parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the
engine is running. The vehicle's
doors will be locked.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not
use the remote start feature. The
vehicle may run out of fuel.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
If your vehicle has the remote
start feature, the RKE transmitter
functions will have an increased
range of operation. However, the
range may be less while the vehicle
is running.
3. After entering the vehicle during
a remote start, press the brake
pedal and turn the ignition to
ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The automatic climate control will
begin to heat or cool your vehicle
during remote start depending on
the temperature inside and outside
of the vehicle. The windshield
defroster and/or rear window
defogger turn on if it is cold outside.
If the vehicle has heated seats,
they may also be turned on during
remote start to warm up the seat
in cold weather. Normal operation
of the climate control system
After a remote start, the engine
will automatically shut off after
10 minutes unless a time
extension has been done or
the ignition has been turned to
ON/RUN.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑4 for
additional information.
returns after the ignition is turned
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-13
Extending Engine Run Time
A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start attempts are allowed
between ignition cycles.
Conditions in Which Remote Start
Will Not Work
To extend the engine run time by
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 and 2
while the engine is still running.
The engine run time can only be
extended if it is the first remote start
since the vehicle has been driven.
Remote start can be extended
one time.
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if any of the following
occur:
After the vehicle's engine has been
started two times using the remote
start button, the ignition must be
turned on and then back off before
the remote start procedure can be
used again.
.
The ignition is in any position
other than LOCK/OFF.
.
A keyless access transmitter is
inside the vehicle.
If the remote start procedure
is used again before the
first 10 minute time frame has
ended, the first 10 minutes will
immediately expire and the
second 10 minute time frame will
start.
Shutting the Engine Off After a
Remote Start
.
The vehicle's hood is not closed.
.
The hazard warning flashers
To manually shut off the engine
after a remote start, do any of the
following:
are on.
.
There is an emission control
system malfunction.
.
Press / until the parking lamps
.
The engine coolant temperature
turn off.
For example, if the lock button and
then the remote start buttons are
pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for a total of
15 minutes.
is too high.
.
Turn on the hazard warning
.
The oil pressure is low.
flashers.
.
.
Two remote vehicle starts
Turn the ignition switch on and
have already been used. The
maximum number of remote
starts or remote start attempts
between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
then off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7 for more information.
Door Locks (Sedan)
WARNING (Continued)
.
WARNING
{
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
On vehicles with the Remote
Keyless Access system, the door
unlocks by pulling the door handle
when you have the transmitter with
you. See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7 for more information.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So,
all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and
the doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
the vehicle. Locking the doors
can help prevent this from
happening.
If the windows are down and the
doors are locked, do not reach
in to manually unlock the vehicle
because you will set off the alarm.
From the inside, press the power
door lock switch located on the front
door. See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑17.
There are several ways to lock and
unlock the vehicle.
(Continued)
From the outside, use the key,
or press the lock or unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Push down or pull up on the manual
lock knob, located at the top of the
door near the window, for the rear
doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-15
Door Locks (Coupe)
WARNING (Continued)
.
WARNING
{
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock
your vehicle whenever you
leave it.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers — especially
children — can easily open
the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door
is locked it will not open. You
increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts
properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
.
When you have the transmitter with
you, you may also unlock and open
the door by squeezing the door
handle sensor (A). You do not have
to press the unlock button on the
transmitter. You will be able to open
the door when you press the door
handle sensor and the vehicle
recognizes your keyless access
transmitter. When the passenger
door is opened first, the driver's
door will also unlock.
Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and
unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, press the lock or
unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-16
Keys, Doors and Windows
From the inside, use the power door
lock switch (C) located on the door
panel near the power window
switches. See Power Door Locks on
page 2‑17.
To open a door from the inside,
press the button (B) on the door trim
pull handle and push the door open.
You will hear a tone when the button
is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the
keyless access transmitter is
lost, there are two ways to open
the door.
1. From inside the vehicle, use the
door release handle located on
the floor next to each seat. Pull
the handle up to unlock and
unlatch the door.
3. Pull the door release tab,
located under the package shelf
at the top of the trunk, to unlock
and unlatch the driver door.
2. From outside the vehicle, use
the key in the cylinder above the
license plate to open the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-17
Central Door Unlocking
System
Delayed Locking
With this feature, you can delay the
actual locking of the doors.
Automatic Door Locks
For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the doors will lock
automatically when all doors are
closed, the ignition is on, and the
shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
The doors will automatically unlock
when the vehicle is stopped and the
shift lever is moved into P (Park).
The vehicle has a central door
unlocking feature. When unlocking
the driver door, the other doors can
be unlocked by holding the key
in the turned position for a few
seconds or by quickly turning the
key twice in the lock cylinder.
When the power door lock switch
is pressed when the key is not in
the ignition and the driver door
is opened, a chime will sound
three times indicating that delayed
locking is active.
For vehicles with a manual
When all the doors are closed, the
doors will lock automatically after
five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed,
the five second timer will reset itself
once all the doors are closed again.
transmission, the doors will lock
automatically after the vehicle
speed reaches 8 km (5 mph). The
doors will automatically unlock when
the key is turned off and removed
from the ignition.
Power Door Locks
The switches are located on the
front doors.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
You can press the door lock switch
again or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from
the ignition and press to lock the
doors.
Use the manual or power door locks
to unlock the doors if someone
needs to exit, and to lock the doors
again.
The power door locks can be
programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-18
Keys, Doors and Windows
To set the locks:
Lockout Protection
Safety Locks (Sedan and
Wagon)
The vehicle has rear door security
locks. These prevent passengers
from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
1. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the horizontal position.
If the power door lock switch is
pressed when the key is in the
ignition and a door is open, all the
doors will lock and only the driver
door will unlock. If the doors are
closed, they can be locked by using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Be sure to remove the
key from the ignition when locking
the vehicle.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door
when the security lock is on:
1. Unlock the door using the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
or Keyless Access System
transmitter, if the vehicle has
one, the power door lock switch,
or the rear door manual lock.
This feature can be overridden by
pressing the lock button on the RKE
transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door
security lock:
On vehicles with a Keyless Access
System, the system can be
programmed to alert you when
all the doors are closed and a
transmitter has been left inside
of the vehicle. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
1. Unlock the door and open it from
the outside.
Lock Label shown
The rear door security locks are
located on the inside edge of each
rear door. The rear doors must be
open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is
located near the lock.
2. Insert the key into the security
lock slot and turn it so the slot is
in the vertical position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Trunk Lock Release
2-19
Doors
WARNING (Continued)
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
Trunk (Sedan, Coupe)
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
WARNING
{
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
The remote trunk release button is
on the driver door.
For vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
be in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
For vehicles with a manual
transmission, the shift lever must
be in N (Neutral), and the parking
brake set.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Press the button to open the trunk
or press the button with the trunk
symbol on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-20
Keys, Doors and Windows
With the Keyless Access System,
when you have the transmitter, the
trunk can be opened by the trunk
release button located above the
license plate. The vehicle must be
in P (Park) and the valet mode
turned off.
3. Pull forward on the trunk
release handle to open the
trunk lid.
Rear-Seat Pass Through
If the vehicle has the rear-seat pass
through door, the trunk can be
accessed through the rear seat.
This is useful when transporting
long items.
On vehicles with a split folding
rear seat:
1. Fold down the rear seatback.
See Rear Seats on page 3‑13
for more information.
To open the door, pull down the rear
seat armrest. Then pull the lever all
the way down to release the door.
If the vehicle is locked, the
keyless access transmitter must
be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk
opening for it to be recognized.
2. Reach upward through the
opening to locate the trunk
release handle.
To close the door, push it up and
back into place. Then try to open
the door without pulling up on the
lever to make sure it is locked into
place.
If the vehicle is ever without power,
the trunk area can still be accessed.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release
handle to open the trunk lid.
On vehicles with a rear seat
pass-through door:
Close the trunk by pulling on the
handle. Do not use the handle as a
tie-down.
1. Fold the rear armrest down and
open the pass-through door.
See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
2. Reach upward through the
opening to locate the emergency
trunk release handle. See
“Emergency Trunk Release
Handle” following for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-21
There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle
located on the back wall of the
trunk. This handle will glow following
exposure to light. Pull the release
handle toward the front of the
vehicle to open the trunk from the
inside.
Emergency Trunk Release
Handle
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
.
Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
Liftgate (Wagon)
.
Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that
Power Liftgate Operation
brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
WARNING
{
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Notice: Do not use the
.
If the vehicle is equipped with
a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
when securing items in the trunk
as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-22
Keys, Doors and Windows
into overhead obstructions such as
a garage door or roof mounted
cargo during power operation. The
liftgate can still be opened fully
manually.
WARNING
{
You or others could be injured if
caught in the path of the power
liftgate. Make sure there is no one
in the way of the liftgate as it is
opening and closing.
OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position.
Manual operation of a liftgate that
also has power operation requires
more effort than a standard manual
liftgate.
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
In either the MAX or the ¾ mode,
the liftgate can be power opened
and closed by:
The power liftgate mode selector
switch is located on the driver door.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) to
use the power feature. The taillamps
flash when the power liftgate
moves.
.
Pressing and holding the power
liftgate button & on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving.
See Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7.
Turn the selector switch to choose
one of three modes:
MAX: The liftgate power opens to
the full open height.
3/4: The liftgate power opens to a
reduced open height that can be set
in a range of approximately ¾ open
to full open. Use this setting to
prevent the liftgate from opening
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-23
.
.
Pressing the power liftgate
button in the center of the mode
selector switch on the driver
door, with the driver door
unlocked.
Pressing any button that operates
position. Cargo could fall out of the
vehicle. Close and latch the power
liftgate before driving.
the power liftgate, or the touchpad
while the liftgate is moving, stops it.
Pressing the button or RKE again
reverses the direction. There is a
minimum that the power liftgate
must already be open for the
system to hold it open. If movement
is stopped below that minimum, the
liftgate closes.
If the liftgate is powered open and
the liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the turn signals will flash
and a chime will sound. The liftgate
will stay open, and then slowly
close. See your dealer for service
before using the liftgate.
Pressing the touchpad on the
liftgate outside handle, with all
doors unlocked, to open the
liftgate.
Do not force the liftgate open or
closed during a power cycle.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle
during a power open or close
cycle, a warning chime will sound
and the liftgate will automatically
reverse direction to the full closed
or open position. After removing
the obstacle, the power liftgate
operation can be used again.
If the liftgate encounters multiple
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate.
After removing the obstacles, the
liftgate will resume normal power
operation.
The power liftgate may be
temporarily disabled under extreme
temperatures or low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
can still be operated manually.
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) while the power function
is in progress, the liftgate power
function will continue to completion.
If the transmission is shifted out of
P (Park) and accelerate before the
power liftgate latch is closed, the
liftgate may reverse to the open
.
Pressing and releasing the
power liftgate button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch to
close the liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-24
Keys, Doors and Windows
The vehicle has pinch sensors
located on the side edges of the
liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body
and presses against this sensor, the
liftgate will reverse direction and
open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or
closed manually.
When power opened with
the ¾ mode selected, the liftgate
stops at the new set position.
To open the liftgate, press the
touchpad on the handle on the
outside of the liftgate and lift. To
close the liftgate, use the pull cup.
With the power liftgate disabled, the
liftgate electric latch will still power
latch once contact is made with the
striker. Always close the liftgate
before driving.
If an audible and visual response
is not received when setting the
intermediate stop position, the
liftgate height is below the ¾ open
height minimum, approximately
5 feet at the edge of the liftgate.
If the RKE button is pressed while
power operation is disabled, the turn
signals will flash and the liftgate will
not move.
Setting the Power Liftgate
Intermediate Mode
Manual Operation of Power
Liftgate
To change the liftgate stop position:
To change the liftgate to manual
operation, turn the mode selector
switch to OFF.
1. Turn the liftgate switch to either
the MAX, or the ¾ mode position
and power open the liftgate.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not
open. The liftgate will resume
operation when the battery is
reconnected and charged.
With the power liftgate disabled and
all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
can be manually opened and
closed. Manual operation of a
vehicle with a power liftgate requires
more effort than a standard
2. Stop the liftgate movement at
the desired height by pressing
any button that operates the
power liftgate, or the touchpad.
Manually adjust the liftgate
position if required.
non-power liftgate.
3. Press and hold the button on the
liftgate adjacent to the latch until
the turn signals flash and a beep
sounds to indicate that the new
setting is recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-25
3. Close all doors. The security
light should go off after about
30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light
goes off.
start the vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent
features; however, they do not make
it impossible to steal.
To avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
If a locked door or trunk is opened
without using the key in the driver
door key cylinder or the transmitter,
a ten second pre-alarm will occur.
The horn will chirp and the lights will
flash. If the key is not placed in the
ignition and turned to START or the
door is not unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the transmitter
during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. The headlamps
will flash and the horn will sound for
about 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
.
Lock the vehicle with the door
key after the doors are closed.
Anti-Theft Alarm System
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
.
Always unlock a door with the
transmitter or by using the key
in the driver door cylinder.
Unlocking a door any other way
will set off the alarm.
Turn off the alarm by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter.
How to Detect a Tamper
Condition
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
when the system is arming.
If K is pressed and the horn
sounds, an attempted break-in has
occurred while the system was
armed.
The theft-deterrent system will not
activate if the doors are locked with
the key or the manual door lock.
It activates only if the power door
lock switch is used while the door is
open or with the transmitter. You
should also remember that you can
Arming the System
To arm the system,
1. Open the door.
If the alarm has been activated,
the Theft Attempted message will
appear on the DIC. See Key and
Lock Messages on page 5‑37 for
additional information.
2. Lock the door with the
transmitter. The security light
should come on and stay on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-26
Keys, Doors and Windows
unit in the vehicle and automatically
disarms the system. The vehicle
may not start if the key is damaged.
If the engine still does not start and
the light continues to stay on, try
another key.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
If the engine still does not start with
the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start,
the first key may be damaged. See
your dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new key made.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming
or disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent
system decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys
can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for
programming additional keys only.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
To program a new key do the
following:
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The
key uses a transponder that
matches an immobilizer control
1. Verify that the new key
has 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the current key in the
ignition and start the engine.
If the engine will not start see
your dealer for service.
If the engine still does not start and
the key appears to be undamaged,
try another ignition key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-27
3. After the engine has started,
turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
remove the key.
The system has one or more
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
keyless access transmitters that are
matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly
matched keyless access transmitter
will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged,
you may not be able to start your
vehicle.
4. Insert the key to be programmed
and turn it to ON/RUN within
five seconds of the ignition being
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
5. The security light will turn
off once the key has been
programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security light
went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the ignition
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
The immobilization system is
disarmed when the ignition control
knob is pushed in and a valid
transmitter is found in the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition control knob off and try
again.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if
additional keys are to be
programmed.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
If the ignition control knob does
not rotate, and the keyless
access transmitter appears to be
undamaged, try another keyless
access transmitter. Or, you may
try placing the transmitter in the
transmitter pocket located in the
center console. See “Electronic Key
Not Detected” under Key and Lock
Messages on page 5‑37.
The security light, located in the
instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-28
Keys, Doors and Windows
If the ignition control knob still does
not rotate with the other transmitter,
the vehicle needs service. If the
ignition control knob does rotate, the
first transmitter may be faulty. See
your dealer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a
new keyless access transmitter
programmed to the vehicle.
Power Mirrors
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
CAUTION
{
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
It is possible for the immobilizer
system to learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up
to 4 keyless access transmitters can
be programmed for the vehicle. To
program additional transmitters, see
“Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle” for Keyless Access under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7.
Controls for the outside power
mirrors are on the driver door.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press } or | to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows to
move the mirror.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
3. Press either } or | again to
deselect the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-29
If the vehicle has a rear vision
Folding Mirrors
Interior Mirrors
camera (RVC), see Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) on page 9‑44 for
more information.
Manual
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles with manual fold mirrors
are folded inward toward the vehicle
to prevent damage when going
through an automatic car wash.
Push the mirror outward, to return it
to the original position.
Vehicles with OnStar® will have
controls located at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how
to subscribe to OnStar. See the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information about the services
OnStar provides.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of headlamps from behind
you. The dimming feature comes on
and the indicator light illuminates
each time the vehicle is started.
Heated Mirrors
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors.
Cleaning the Mirror
O (On/Off): Press to turn the
dimming feature on or off.
See Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 8‑1.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-30
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
Windows
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
Leaving children, helpless adults,
or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
The vehicle aerodynamics are
designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
When there are children in the
rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-31
Express-Down/Up Windows
Express Window Anti‐Pinch
Override
Windows with the express feature
allow the windows to be raised and
lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
WARNING
{
If express override is activated,
the window will not reverse
Press or pull the switch fully and
release it to activate the express
feature.
automatically. You or others could
be injured and the window could
be damaged. Before you use
express override, make sure that
all people and obstructions are
clear of the window path.
The express mode can be canceled
by briefly pressing or pulling the
switch.
Sedan Driver Side Shown, Wagon
and Coupe Similar
Express Window Anti-Pinch
Feature
The power window switches are on
the driver door. Each passenger
door has a switch that controls only
that window.
The anti‐pinch feature can be
overridden. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the
second position. The window will
rise for as long as the switch is held.
Once the switch is released, the
express mode is re‐activated.
If any object is in the path of the
window when the express‐up is
active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto‐reverse to a
preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe icing
may also cause the window to
auto‐reverse. The window will
return to normal operation after the
obstruction or condition is removed.
Press the switch to lower the
window to the desired level. Pull the
switch up to raise the window.
In this mode, the window can close
on an object in its path. Use care
when using the override mode.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
allows the use of the power
windows after the ignition has been
turned off. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 9‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-32
Keys, Doors and Windows
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Programming the Power
Windows
Sun Visors
If the vehicle battery has been
recharged, disconnected or not
working, the front power windows
will need to be reprogrammed for
the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The rear
window lockout button is located on
the driver door near the window
switches.
Press the right side of the button to
disable the rear window switches.
The light on the button indicates it is
on. The rear windows still can be
raised or lowered using the driver
window switches when the lockout
feature is active.
To program:
1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or when
Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active, close all doors.
Pull the sun visor down to block
glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
2. Press and hold the power
window switch until the window
is fully open.
To restore power to the rear
windows, press the button again.
The light on the button will go out.
3. Pull the power window switch up
until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-33
Express-Open: To open the
sunshade, fully press and release
the rear of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
open. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
Express-Open: To open the
Roof
sunroof, fully press and release the
rear of the passenger side switch.
The sunroof will automatically open.
To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time.
Sunroof (Sedan and
Wagon)
If the vehicle has a power sunroof it
will only operate when the ignition is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑22.
Express-Close: To close the
sunroof, fully press and release the
front of the driver's side switch. The
sunroof will automatically close. To
stop the sunroof partway, press the
switch a second time.
Express-Close: To close the
sunshade, fully press and release
the front of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
close. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
Comfort Stop Feature: The
sunroof has a comfort stop feature
which stops the sunroof from
The sunroof switches are located on
the overhead console.
The sunshade will open
automatically with the sunroof, but
can also be opened manually.
opening to the full-open position.
From the comfort stop position,
press the rear of the passenger side
switch a second time to open the
sunroof to the full-open position.
Vent Feature: Press and hold the
front of the passenger side switch to
vent the sunroof. The sunshade will
automatically open approximately
fifteen inches. Press and hold the
rear of the passenger side switch to
close the sunroof vent.
The driver side switch operates the
sunshade.
Press and hold the rear of the
switch to open the sunshade. Press
and hold the front of the switch to
close the sunshade.
The passenger side switch operates
the sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-34
Keys, Doors and Windows
operation, noise or plugging the
water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the
sunroof/sunshade from closing at
the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof/sunshade will then return
to the full-open position. To close
the sunroof/sunshade, see
“Express-Close” earlier in this
section.
The driver side switch operates the
sunshade.
Press and hold the rear of the
switch to open the sunshade. Press
and hold the front of the switch to
close the sunshade.
Sunroof (Coupe)
If the vehicle has a power sunroof it
will only operate when the ignition is
in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑22.
Express-Open: To open the
sunshade, fully press and release
the rear of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
open. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
The sunroof switches are located on
the overhead console.
Express-Close: To close the
sunshade, fully press and release
the front of the driver side switch.
The sunshade will automatically
close. To stop the sunshade
partway, press the switch a
second time.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-35
The sunshade will open
automatically with the sunroof, but
can also be opened manually.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof/sunshade when it is
closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the
sunroof/sunshade from closing
at the point of the obstruction.
The sunroof/sunshade will then
return to the full-open position. To
close the sunroof/sunshade, see
“Express-Close” earlier in this
section.
The passenger side switch operates
the sunroof.
Dirt and debris may collect on the
Press and hold the front of the
passenger side switch to vent
the sunroof. The sunshade will
automatically open approximately
fifteen inches. Press and hold the
rear of the passenger side switch to
close the sunroof vent.
sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise or plugging the
water drainage system. Periodically
open the sunroof and remove any
obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the
sunroof seal and roof sealing area
using a clean cloth, mild soap, and
water. Do not remove grease from
sunroof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-36
Keys, Doors and Windows
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-1
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-42
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-43
Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
How to Wear Safety Belts
Seats and
Restraints
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-28
Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-3
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-49
Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-51
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Replacing LATCH System
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe
Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated and Ventilated Front
Airbag System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-32
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Passenger Sensing
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Securing Child Restraints
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-61
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front seats have
adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
The vehicle's rear seats have head
restraints in the outboard seating
positions, but they are not
adjustable.
WARNING
{
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top
of the seatback, and push the
restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle's head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-3
To adjust a manual seat:
Active Head Restraints
Front Seats
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions. These automatically tilt
forward to reduce the risk of neck
injury if the vehicle is hit from
behind.
Seat Adjustment
WARNING
{
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-4
Seats and Restraints
To fold the seatback, pull the
handle (A) on the upper seatback.
The seatback will fold forward.
Easy Entry Seat
(Coupe Models Only)
WARNING
{
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To move the seat forward, press
and hold the top of the switch (B) on
the upper seatback. To move the
seat rearward, press and hold the
bottom of the switch (B). Release
the switch when the seat reaches
the desired position.
After entering or exiting the rear
seat, return the seatback to the
upright position. Push and pull on
the seatback to make sure is
locked.
A driver seat entry/exit position
can be recalled automatically using
the vehicle personalization menu.
See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Column” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑5 and Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
A. Folding Seatback Handle
B. Seat Adjustment Switch
On coupe models, the front seats
can be moved out of the way to
make it easier to get in and out of
the rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-5
.
Raise or lower the entire seat
by moving the entire horizontal
control up or down.
mirrors, and the steering column
Power Seat Adjustment
position, if the vehicle is equipped
with the power tilt and telescopic
steering column.
Power Seats
To adjust the seatback, see
“Power Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑8 for
more information.
1: Saves and recalls for driver 1.
2: Saves and recalls for driver 2.
B (Exit Button): Moves the driver
seat and/or power steering column
to the exit position. See “Exit Recall”
later in this section for more
information.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Steering Column
Storing Memory Positions
To save into memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, outside
mirrors, and the power steering
column, if equipped, to the
desired driving positions.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or
rearward.
2. Press and hold “1” until
two beeps sound.
.
Raise or lower the front or rear
3. Repeat for a second driver
part of the seat cushion by
moving the front or rear of the
horizontal control up or down.
using “2.”
On vehicles with the memory
feature, memory buttons 1 and 2 on
the driver door are used to save and
recall memory settings for the driver
seat cushion and seatback, outside
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-6
Seats and Restraints
The vehicle comes with two keyless
entry transmitters. Each transmitter
has a number “1” or “2” on it. These
numbers correspond to “1” and “2”
on the driver door. The current
driver is identified when the unlock
button on the transmitter is pressed,
or when “1” or “2” on the driver door
is pressed.
Automatic Entry Recall
Exit Recall
If entry/exit recall is programmed
on in the vehicle personalization
menu, automatic entry recall occurs
when the ignition is turned on. See
“Entry/Exit Recall” under Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
B (Exit Button): Press to move
the driver seat and/or power
steering column, if equipped, to the
exit position. A single beep sounds
when the exit feature activates.
The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
an automatic transmission, or the
parking brake must be applied for a
manual transmission.
To stop recall movement, press
one of the power seat, memory,
or outside mirror buttons, or the
power steering column switch,
if equipped.
To recall memory positions, press
and release “1” or “2.” The vehicle
must be in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission, or the parking brake
must be applied for a manual
transmission. A single beep will
sound when the button is pressed.
The seat, outside mirrors, and/or
power steering column will move to
the position previously stored for the
identified driver.
If entry/exit recall is programmed on
in the vehicle personalization menu,
automatic seat and/or steering
column movement occurs under the
following conditions:
If something has blocked the
driver seat or the steering column
while recalling a memory position,
the recall may stop. Remove
the obstruction; then press the
appropriate control for the area that
is not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the memory position again
by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still
not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
.
The ignition key is removed on
vehicles with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE).
.
The ignition is turned to OFF
and the driver door is opened on
vehicles with Remote Keyless
Access.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-7
If entry/exit recall is programmed
off and the exit button is pressed,
the driver seat will move back a
preset distance and the steering
column, if equipped, will move
up and forward. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
Lumbar Adjustment
If something has blocked the driver
seat while recalling the exit position,
the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
A. Side Bolster Adjustment
B. Lumbar Support Adjustment
If available, hold the control on the
outboard side of the seat forward or
rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support on the driver or
front passenger seat.
C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-8
Seats and Restraints
.
Press the top or bottom of
control (C) to increase or
decrease support in the
seatback bolsters.
Power Lumbar
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the lumbar support,
if equipped:
WARNING
{
.
Press and hold the top of
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
Thigh Support
Adjustment
control (B) to increase support
to the top of the seatback and
decrease support to the bottom
of the lumbar.
.
Press and hold the bottom of the
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
control to decrease support to
the top of the seatback and
increase support to the bottom
of the seatback.
.
Press and hold the front or rear
of the control to increase or
decrease support to the entire
seatback.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Side Bolster
To adjust the side bolster support,
if equipped:
If available, adjust the manual leg
extension by reaching under it, in
the pocketed area. Press the button
and pull or push to lengthen or
shorten it. Release the button to
lock it in place.
.
Press the top or bottom of
(Continued)
control (A) to increase or
decrease support in seat
cushion bolsters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-9
To recline a manual seatback:
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
{
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-10
Seats and Restraints
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Heated Front Seats
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
WARNING
{
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
.
may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
Tilt the top of the vertical control
rearward to recline.
.
Tilt the top of the vertical control
forward to raise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-11
A light bar in the climate control
display shows the setting; high,
medium, or low.
Remote Start Heated Seats
When it is cold outside, the heated
seats may turn on during a vehicle
remote start. The heated seats will
be canceled when the ignition is
turned on. Press the button to use
the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
Press either button to turn on the
heated seats at the highest setting.
Press and release the button to
decrease the setting. To turn the
heated seat off, press and release
the button until the light turns off.
The indicator lights on the climate
control display do not turn on during
a remote start.
The heated seats turn off when the
vehicle is turned off.
The performance of an unoccupied
heated seat may be reduced.
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑12 for more information.
Press M or L to heat the driver or
passenger seat and seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-12
Seats and Restraints
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats
The heated or ventilated seats turn
off when the vehicle is turned off.
WARNING
{
Remote Start Heated Seats
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. See
the Warning under Heated Front
Seats on page 3‑10.
During a remote start, the heated
seats may turn on, depending upon
the outside temperature. They are
canceled when the ignition is turned
on. Press the button to use the
heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
If available, the buttons are on the
climate control panel.
The indicator lights on the climate
control display do not turn on during
a remote start.
Press M to heat the seat or { to
cool the seat.
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights on the
climate control display indicate
three for the highest setting and
one for the lowest.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2‑12 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-13
Sedan or Coupe
Wagon
Rear Seats
To lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
To lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
The vehicle may have a split folding
rear seat.
1. Pull forward on the tab, on the
outboard side of the seatback, to
unlock the seatback.
1. Pull on the lever, on the top
outboard side of the seatback, to
unlock the seatback.
2. Fold the seatback down. This
allows access to the trunk.
2. Fold the seatback down.
See Trunk (Sedan, Coupe) on
page 2‑19 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-14
Seats and Restraints
To return a seatback to the upright
position:
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
WARNING
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
the vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
WARNING
{
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
WARNING
{
Do not let anyone ride where
a safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and
check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it
back into place.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 5‑16 for additional information.
2. Make sure the seatback is
locked into place by pushing and
pulling on it.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the
other seatback.
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
When the seatback is not in use, it
should be kept in the upright, locked
position.
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-15
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-16
Seats and Restraints
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-17
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true not
only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are
belted. And you can unbuckle
a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-18
Seats and Restraints
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 3‑44 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑47. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 miles) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-19
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you
slid under it, the belt would apply
force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-20
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
not give nearly as much
protection this way.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place
like this. In a crash, the belt would
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
on the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle the belt into the
buckle nearest you.
You can be seriously injured if the
belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-22
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
{
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
A: The belt is behind the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-23
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-24
Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
later in this section for use and
important safety information.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑28.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
If the shoulder portion of a
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
(Sedan and Wagon)
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
Adjust the guide so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑18.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Push down on the release button (A)
and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
Before a door is closed, be sure
the safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
After the height adjuster is set to the
desired position, try to move it down
without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-26
Seats and Restraints
Pretensioners work only once. If the
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and possibly other
parts of the safety belt system will
need to be replaced. See Replacing
Safety Belt System Parts After a
Crash on page 3‑29.
Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if the
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side or
rear crash.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the shoulder belt away
from the neck and head.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from
between the edge of the
seatback and the interior body
to remove the guide from its
storage clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-27
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt
and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
WARNING
{
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could
be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-28
Seats and Restraints
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Pull the
guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto
the clip. Turn the guide and clip
inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body,
leaving only the loop of the elastic
cord exposed.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear
a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-29
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After a
Crash
WARNING
{
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 5‑16 for more
information.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑29.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑17.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-30
Seats and Restraints
For frontal airbags, the word
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the outboard front passenger.
WARNING
{
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing a safety belt — even if
the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
are designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
Also, airbags are not designed to
deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are the only
restraint. See When Should an
Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
.
A frontal airbag for the outboard
front passenger.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the outboard front
passenger.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
Wearing a safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the
outboard front passenger and
the passenger seated directly
behind the outboard front
passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-31
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to any airbag, as you would
be if you were sitting on the edge
of the seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a
crash. Always wear a safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑44 or Infants
and Young Children on
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑17 for more
information.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
page 3‑47.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-32
Seats and Restraints
Where Are the Airbags?
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
The outboard front passenger
frontal airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger side.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and outboard
front passenger are in the side of
the seatbacks closest to the door.
The driver's frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-33
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
WARNING (Continued)
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or
outboard front passenger's head
and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the
impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how
severe a crash is likely to be in time
for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
Driver Side shown, Passenger
Side similar
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
outboard front passenger, and
second row outboard passengers
are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of
an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
WARNING
{
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-34
Seats and Restraints
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For
example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
.
If the vehicle hits a stationary
In addition, the vehicle has
Roof-rail airbags are not
object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
dual-stage frontal airbags.
intended to inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of
the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck or
if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
.
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or
because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See
Airbag System on page 3‑30.
.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-35
In a rollover event, roof‐rail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.
full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
But airbags would not help in
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion
is not toward those airbags. See
When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 3‑33 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Airbags supplement the
protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly
over the occupant's upper body,
stopping the occupant more
gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the
force of the impact more evenly
over the occupant's upper body.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
After the frontal airbags and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head and chest of occupants
in the outboard seating positions
in the first and second rows. The
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk of
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-36
Seats and Restraints
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps, turn on the
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
the hazard warning flashers by
using the controls for those
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
WARNING
{
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
features.
WARNING
{
.
Airbags are designed to inflate
only once. After an airbag
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions in
the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-37
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the outboard front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. The driver airbag,
seat‐mounted side impact airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 13‑16 and Event Data
Recorders on page 13‑16.
United States
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the outboard front passenger seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the
outboard front passenger frontal
airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
.
Let only qualified technicians
work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Canada and Mexico
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If the
vehicle has remote start, and it is
being used to start the vehicle from
a distance, you may not see the
system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word
ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or
off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the outboard
front passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator
will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
page 5‑18.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-38
Seats and Restraints
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the outboard
front passenger airbag if:
WARNING (Continued)
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
.
The outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines an infant
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag is turned off.
is present in a child restraint.
.
An outboard front passenger
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
WARNING
{
Secure rear-facing child
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the outboard
front passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18.
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-39
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
outboard front passenger frontal
airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the outboard front
passenger seat.
3. Remove any additional items
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑17 for more
information, including important
safety information.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) on page 3‑59 or
Securing Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 3‑61.
When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active.
For some children, including
children in child restraints,
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is
still lit, turn the vehicle off.
Then slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint
and for very small adults, the
passenger sensing system may or
may not turn off the outboard front
passenger frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the
vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-40
Seats and Restraints
Also make sure the child
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the outboard front passenger
frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head
restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 3‑2.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the
airbag for a child in a child
restraint depending upon the
child's seating posture and body
build. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in
the outboard front passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
5. Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-41
A wet seat can affect the
performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on
an unoccupied seat. If this is not
desired remove the object from
the seat.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
.
The passenger sensing system
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
may turn off the passenger
airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off
indicator will be lit, and the
airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel will also be lit.
WARNING
{
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
.
Liquid pooled on the seat that
has not soaked in may make it
more likely that the passenger
sensing system will enable (turn
on) the passenger airbag while a
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger
airbag is turned on, the on
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and
seat massagers can affect how
well the passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that
you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑42 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
indicator will be lit.
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
the seat immediately. If the airbag
readiness light is lit, do not install a
child restraint or allow anyone to
occupy the seat. See Airbag
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system.
Readiness Light on page 5‑17 for
important safety information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-42
Seats and Restraints
To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 13‑14.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system
for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim
is replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or
trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 3‑37.
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
WARNING
{
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors,
rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
3-43
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑1
or Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico) on
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are
in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in
this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑1 or
Customer Satisfaction
page 5‑17 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
page 13‑3.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 10‑83 for additional
important information.
Procedure (Mexico) on
page 13‑3.
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Inflate? on page 3‑35. See your
dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-44
Seats and Restraints
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
Child Restraints
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away.
See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 5‑17 for more information.
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-45
.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
The manufacturer's instructions that
come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of
the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑24.
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 3‑24 for more information.
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-46
Seats and Restraints
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
WARNING (Continued)
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then
be applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the
two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured.
A safety belt must be used by
only one person at a time.
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-47
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Infants and Young
Children
WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-48
Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
WARNING
{
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
The restraint manufacturer's
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-49
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-50
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the
vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
To help reduce the chance of
injury, the child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-51
Children can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
In some areas of the United
States and Canada, Certified
Child Passenger Safety
Where to Put the
Restraint
Technicians (CPSTs) are available
to inspect and demonstrate how
to correctly use and install child
restraints. In the U.S., refer to the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety
seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
WARNING
{
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-52
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great if the airbag
deploys.
Child restraints and booster seats
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
WARNING (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Depending on where you place
the child restraint and the size of
the child restraint you may not be
able to access adjacent safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors
for additional passengers or
child restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if the
child restraint prevents access to or
interferes with the routing of the
safety belt.
Secure rear-facing child
WARNING
{
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑37 for additional
information.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
When securing a child restraint
in a rear seating position, study
the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors
3-53
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a
child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to
attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions or
child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-54
Seats and Restraints
Your child restraint may
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have
a single attachment (B) to secure
the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child
restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the
top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Rear Seat ‐ Sedan or Wagon
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-55
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position with
lower anchors has two labels, near
the crease between the seatback
and the seat cushion. For a wagon
the lower anchors are beneath
zippers, located near the labels.
Open the zippers to access the
lower anchors.
Rear Seat ‐ Coupe
Sedan
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
To assist you in locating the top
tether anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the cover.
Coupe
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-56
Seats and Restraints
the vehicle floor, behind the rear
seatback. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
WARNING
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured
or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Wagon
The top tether anchors for a sedan
or a coupe are located under the
tether covers, on the rear seatback
filler panel. For the wagon, the
outboard top tether anchors are
located under the tether covers
behind the rear seatback. The
wagon's center top tether anchor is
under the tether cover, located on
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3‑51 for
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-57
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
1.1. Find the lower anchors
for the desired seating
position.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
one child restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
WARNING
{
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
1. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments to the
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
lower anchors. If the child
restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the
cover to open the cover and
expose the anchor.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-58
Seats and Restraints
2.3. If you have an adjustable
head restraint, raise the
head restraint.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
headrest or head restraint.
If the position you are using
does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-59
Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
Parts After a Crash
(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
WARNING
{
A crash can damage the
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly after
a crash, see your dealer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the child restraint has the
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
LATCH system, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for how and
where to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on
page 3‑53 for top tether anchor
locations.
3. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To
check, grasp the child restraint
at the LATCH path and attempt
to move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should be
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement for proper installation.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-60
Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑51.
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-61
6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for more
information.
Securing Child Restraints
(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 3‑51
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the front
passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37
and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18 for more
information, including important
safety information.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top
tether anchor, disconnect it.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-62
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑53 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
WARNING
{
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑53 for
top tether anchor locations.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
or killed if the front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the
front passenger airbag inflates
and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
the front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑37 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
3-63
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
passenger frontal airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when the
vehicle is started. See
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 5‑18.
Position the release button on
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-64
Seats and Restraints
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see “If
the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑37 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To
check, grasp the child restraint
at the safety belt path and
attempt to move it side‐to‐side
and back‐and‐forth. When
the child restraint is properly
installed, there should be no
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of
movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-1
Cupholders
Storage
Compartments
Storage
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Management System
(Wagon Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Net (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Convenience Net (Sedan and
Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
There are cupholders in the front
of the center console. Push the
cover (A) to open.
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System (Wagon) . . . 4-6
There are also cupholders in the
rear center armrest. Pull the armrest
down to use.
There is a storage area below the
climate control system. To access,
push the cover.
Glove Box
To open, press the button. Use the
key to lock and unlock. The glove
box has a shelf that can be removed
by pulling it out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2
Storage
2. Align the cartridge over the
pin (B) on both sides. Press
the cartridge down and turn it
slightly forward until it clicks.
Center Console Storage
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Cover (Wagon)
The cargo cover can be used to
cover items in the cargo area.
3. The cartridge is properly
installed if it fits firmly when
pulled and pushed.
4. Grasp the handle and unroll the
cover. Latch the posts into the
sockets.
To remove the cargo cover:
1. Release the cover from the
latch posts and carefully roll it
back up.
The center console has an upper
and lower storage area. To access,
lift the levers on either side of
the center console. There is an
additional storage area behind the
center console. To access, push the
cover.
2. Pull the handle (A) back and
remove it from the pin (B) on the
trim panel. Repeat this on the
other side.
To install the cargo cover:
1. Hold the cartridge with the
pull-out shade toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-3
Cargo Management
System (Wagon Only)
WARNING
{
An improperly stored cargo cover
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a collision or sudden
maneuver. Someone could be
injured. If the cover is removed,
always store it in the proper
storage location. When it is
replaced, always be sure that
it is securely reattached.
The cover can be opened to
two positions to allow access to
the storage area.
Some items may be stored in the
cargo area when the cover is
closed.
Press the bottom of the load floor
handle assembly to lift the top on
the handle. Pull up on the handle
to open the cargo management
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Storage
D-Ring Sliders
Cargo Net (Wagon)
There are four D-Ring sliders that
move along rails on both sides of
the cargo management area. These
can be used as tie-downs when
storing cargo.
WARNING
{
Do not stack items higher than
the upper end of the cargo net or
hang anything from the net. Avoid
items that have sharp edges or
that apply excessive force to the
net. If items are not properly
stored, damage to the net could
occur and items can be thrown
about the vehicle. You or others
could be injured. Always store
items behind the net.
Installing D-Ring Sliders
The loop of the D-Ring slider must
be facing inward toward the storage
area and the ring must be in the up
position for proper usage.
Push the button to move the D-Ring
slider. The rings can be locked into
various positions along the rail.
For vehicles equipped with a cargo
net, it can be used to store light
loads, keeping them from falling
over or being thrown.
To install the D-Ring slider (A),
insert it into the channel (B) located
in the middle of each rail.
The net should not be overloaded or
used to store heavy loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-5
1. There are four installation points
in the roof, two located in front of
and two behind the rear seats.
3. Mount the cargo net to the rear
seat tethers located on the front
of the bottom cushions.
4. The net can also be mounted to
the tethers on the back of the
rear seats when the seats are
upright.
Insert the top corners of the
cargo net into the large opening
in the roof and secure by sliding
them into the small opening.
2. There are four tether positions
for the lower hook straps. In the
front position, the seat backs
should be down for the net to
properly hold items.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Storage
crossrails can be purchased as
an accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System
(Wagon)
Notice: Loading cargo on the
roof rack that weighs more than
75 kg (165 lbs) or hangs over the
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the crossrails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
WARNING
{
If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind
can catch it while the vehicle is
being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off,
and this could cause a collision,
and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
than the roof rack on top of the
vehicle unless using a GM
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle’s center
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers,
otherwise it may result in loss of
control. If driving for a long distance,
on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place.
5. Pull on the straps to tighten
the net.
Convenience Net
(Sedan and Coupe)
The vehicle may have a
convenience net in the rear. Put
small loads behind the net. It can
also be positioned into an envelope
style to hold smaller items. The net
is not for heavier loads. Store items
as far forward as you can.
certified accessory carrier.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the
rack can be used to load items.
For roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
4-7
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle
capacity when loading the vehicle.
For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11.
Installing the Crossrails
1. Identify the front and rear
crossrail.
3. The crossrail supports are
labeled with an arrow that needs
to point toward the front of the
vehicle. A pin (A) will be visible
on the bottom when the crossrail
support lever is down. To install
the crossrail support, move the
lever into the forward upper
position, the pin (A) will not be
visible.
2. The front crossrail (A) is smaller
than the rear crossrail (B).
A. Crossrails
B. Siderail Cover
Before installing the crossrails (A),
remove the siderail covers (B). Pull
straight up on the rear of the siderail
cover. Store covers flat, do not stack
items on them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Storage
7. Move the levers on both
crossrails to the down position.
Slide the crossrail until the
crossrail pin engages.
8. The crossrails should lock in the
same hole position on each side.
Removing the Crossrails
1. Move both levers of the crossrail
into the upper forward position.
2. Slide the crossrail into the
cut-out area.
4. Locate the forward or rearward
cut-out (A) in the siderail
channel.
6. Levers must still be in the
forward up position. Move the
front crossrail forward beyond
the cut-out area (B). For the
rear crossrail, slide the crossrail
assembly (A) rearward until the
entire crossrail support is in
first position beyond the channel
cut-out area (B).
3. Remove the crossrail from the
vehicle.
4. Repeat for the other crossrail.
5. Insert both crossrail ends into
the cut-outs, making sure the
arrows are pointed toward the
front of the vehicle.
5. Replace the siderail covers on
the siderails.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-1
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . 5-14
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-19
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Brake System Warning
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Instruments and
Controls
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Vehicle Messages
(Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Headlamp Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-32
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-34
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Engine Cooling System
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Traction Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-24
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-25
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Instruments and Controls
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Power Tilt Wheel
Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-43
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Steering Wheel
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-45 Adjustment
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Universal Remote System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
For vehicles with the power tilt
wheel, the control is on the left side
of the steering column.
.
Push the control up or down to
To adjust the steering wheel:
tilt the steering wheel up
or down.
1. Pull the lever down.
.
Push the control forward or
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
rearward to move the steering
wheel toward the front or rear of
the vehicle.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-3
.
For vehicles without a navigation
Steering Wheel Controls
(Audio)
y / c z (Previous/Next): Press
to go to the previous or next radio
station stored as a favorite, or the
previous or next track of a CD.
Press to interact with the Bluetooth®
system. See Bluetooth on
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to interact with
OnStar® or Bluetooth. See
the OnStar Owner's Guide,
or Bluetooth on page 7‑37 for
more information about these
features.
page 7‑37 for more information.
.
+ e − (Volume): Press to increase
or to decrease the volume.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, OnStar, or Bluetooth,
press and hold g for
b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/
Push to Talk): Press and release
to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired
headphones, if the vehicle has
these features, does not mute.
two seconds and say “hands
free” to interact with OnStar or
Bluetooth. See the OnStar
Owner's Guide , or Bluetooth on
page 7‑37 for more information
about these features.
Some audio steering wheel controls
could differ depending on the
vehicle's options. Controls that can
be adjusted at the steering wheel
may include:
Press and release b g again, to
turn the sound on.
.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, press and hold g for
two seconds to initiate speech
recognition. See “Speech
Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more
information.
SRCE (Source): Press to
switch between the radio AM, FM,
XM™ (if equipped), CD, DVD
(if equipped), HDD (if equipped),
auxiliary input jack, and USB
(if equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Instruments and Controls
Heated Steering Wheel
Horn
For vehicles with a heated steering
wheel.
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Wagon Model Shown
The windshield wiper lever is on the
right side of the steering column.
Move the windshield wiper lever to
select the wiper speed.
7 (Mist): Single wipe, briefly
move the lever down and release.
Several wipes, hold the lever down.
T (Off): Turns the wipers off.
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
For a delayed wiping cycle, turn the
adjustable interval wiper band to set
the frequency of wipes.
( : Press to turn the heated
steering wheel on or off. A light on
the button displays when the feature
is turned on.
Sedan and Coupe Model Shown
6 (Adjustable Interval Wiper
Band): Turn the band up for more
frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
The steering wheel takes about
three minutes to start heating.
1 : Slow wipes.
2 : Fast wipes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-5
If the windshield wipers are in use
for about six seconds while you are
driving, the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp
control is in AUTO. See “Wiper
Activated Headlamps” for more
information.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
Windshield Washer
displays on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the washer fluid
is low. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27.
WARNING
{
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 for
information on filling the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
should be replaced. For more
If the headlamps are on while the
windshield is being washed, the
headlamp washers, if the vehicle
has them, will also turn on. See
“Headlamp Washer” following for
more information.
Sedan and Coupe Model
K (Washer Fluid): Press the end
of the windshield washer lever, to
wash the windshield. The washer
fluid sprays onto the windshield and
the wipers run for a few cycles to
clear the windshield. Press and
information, see Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑34.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the
headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have
been in use for about six seconds.
For this feature to work, the exterior
lamp control must be in AUTO.
Wiper Arm Assembly Protection
hold K for more wash cycles.
When using an automatic car wash,
move the windshield wiper lever to
the OFF position. This disables
the windshield wipers and/or rear
wipers, if equipped.
Wagon Model
Pull the lever to spray washer
fluid on the windshield. The spray
continues until the lever is released.
The wipers will run a few times.
The wiper-activated headlamps
immediately turn off when the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF,
or the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-6
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window
Wiper/Washer
For vehicles with a rear window
wiper/washer, the controls are on
the end of the windshield wiper
lever.
Z (Rear Wiper Delay Short):
Sets a five‐second delay between
wipes.
Headlamp Washer
For vehicles with headlamp washers
they clear debris from the headlamp
lenses.
5 (Rear Wiper Delay Long): Sets
a 10‐second delay between wipes.
= (Rear Washer): Push the
windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its
starting position when released.
The windshield washer reservoir is
used for the windshield and the rear
window. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir if either washer is not
working. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
The headlamp washers are beneath
the headlamps.
WARNING
{
Press the washer button at the end
of the windshield wiper lever, to
wash the headlamps. Both the
headlamps and the windshield will
be washed. After the first wash, the
headlamps will not be washed until
the fifth press of the windshield
washer button.
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
and rear wiper delay.
The system turns off when the
button is returned to the middle
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-7
The headlamps must be on to be
washed. If the headlamps are off,
only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed.
If the washer fluid is low, the
vehicle is in P (Park). On a
manual transmission vehicle,
only set it when the vehicle is
stopped.
3. Press V to scroll through and
select the appropriate
variance zone.
4. Press 3 until the vehicle
heading, for example, N for
North, is displayed in the DIC.
Press T until Press V To
Change Compass Zone
displays.
headlamp washers will not work.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4 for more information.
5. Calibrate the compass. See
“Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
Compass
Compass Calibration
The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
The compass can be manually
calibrated. Only calibrate the
compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open
parking lot, where driving the
vehicle in circles is not a danger.
Also, away from tall buildings, utility
wires, manhole covers, or other
industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight. If you
do not live in zone eight or drive out
of the area, the variance needs to
be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance, use
the following procedure:
2. Find the vehicle's current
location and variance zone
number on the map.
Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone
when the vehicle is moving.
On an automatic transmission
vehicle, only set it when the
Zones 1 through 15 are
available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-8
Instruments and Controls
If the DIC display does not show a
heading, for example, N for North,
or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off
the vehicle, move the magnetic
item, then turn on the vehicle and
calibrate the compass.
Do not operate any switches
such as window, sunroof,
climate controls, seats, etc.
during the calibration procedure.
Clock
The analog clock is located on the
instrument panel above the radio.
The clock is not connected with any
other vehicle system and runs by
itself. To adjust the clock:
2. Press T until Press V To
Calibrate Compass displays.
1. Locate the adjustment buttons
directly below the clock.
3. Press V to start the compass
calibration.
2. Push and release the right
adjustment button to move the
clock hands forward or the left
adjustment button to make the
clock hands go backward.
4. The DIC will display Calibrating
Drive In Circles. Drive the
vehicle in tight circles at less
than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete
the calibration. The DIC will
display Calibration Complete for
a few seconds then returns to
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass,
check that the compass is set to
the correct variance zone. See
“Compass Variance (Zone)
Procedure” earlier in this
section.
Holding either button down will
cause the clock to advance
faster. Release the button before
the desired time is reached.
the Press V To Calibrate
Compass display.
3. Push and release either button
to adjust the time by one minute
increments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-9
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Notice: Hanging heavy
equipment from the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The power outlets are designed
for accessory power plugs only,
such as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlets
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There are three accessory power
outlets. The power outlets located
below the climate control system,
inside the center console storage
bin, and on the rear of the center
console are powered while the
vehicle is in ON/RUN, START or
ACC/ACCESSORY mode, or until
the driver door is opened within
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
Cigarette Lighter
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
The vehicle may have a cigarette
lighter. To use the lighter, push it in
all the way and let go. When it is
ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
On the CTS Wagon there is an
additional accessory power outlet
located near the rear cargo net that
is powered at all times.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included
with the equipment. See Add-On
Electrical Equipment on page 9‑59.
Remove the cover to access and
replace when not in use.
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-10
Instruments and Controls
Gauges can indicate when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Ashtrays
The vehicle may have
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can
signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
two removable ashtrays.
One ashtray can be placed into
the instrument panel storage
compartment and the other into the
center console rear compartment.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
To empty the ashtrays, hold on to
the edges of the bin and pull straight
out. To reinstall, push the tray back
into place.
Warning lights come on when there
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-11
Instrument Cluster
English shown, Metric similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-12
Instruments and Controls
English V-Series shown, Metric and Manual similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-13
The trip odometer is part of the
Driver Information Center (DIC);
for more information see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27.
up-shift to avoid the engine
speed limit. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9‑26 or
Manual Transmission on page 9‑31
for more information.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
For vehicles that have the
navigation system, see the
Navigation System manual for
more information.
Fuel Gauge
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
Tachometer
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
odometer. The digital odometer will
read 999,999 if it is turned back.
The tachometer displays the
engine speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, it must be set to the
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it must
be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
When the ignition is on, the fuel
gauge indicates how much fuel is
left in the tank.
The CTS-V tachometer has tracer
lights that follow the movement of
the tachometer indicator. The tracer
lights also flash when it is time to
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the
number of kilometers or miles
traveled for up to two trips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-14
Instruments and Controls
The Fuel Level Low message
appears in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
Messages on page 5‑36 for more
information.
For the CTS-V, this gauge is located
in the instrument panel cluster.
Boost Gauge
This gauge indicates positive
manifold pressure which is the
induction air pressure level in the
intake manifold before it enters the
combustion chamber. This gauge
reads zero under light throttle before
boost is generated.
Normal operation of the fuel gauge
includes:
.
At the service station, the fuel
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
The gauge automatically resets
to zero every time the engine is
started.
.
It takes a little more or less
fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated.
Engine Speed Limiter
Metric
.
This feature prevents the engine
speed from reaching an unsafe
level. If the level is too high, the
throttle closes or limits the fuel
supply until the engine speed
returns to a safe level. Throttle
operation and fuel supply return
to normal when engine speed is
lowered.
The gauge moves a little while
turning a corner or speeding up.
.
The gauge takes a few seconds
to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and goes back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
English
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-15
For the CTS-V, the tachometer
tracer lights flash prior to reaching
engine speed limit. The tracer lights
also flash on automatic transmission
vehicles while in the DSC or Tap
Shift modes.
A reading outside the normal
operating range may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or
some other problem causing low oil
pressure. Oil should be checked as
soon as possible. See Oil Pressure
Low Stop Engine under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 and Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge
WARNING
{
English
Do not keep driving if the oil
For vehicles with an engine oil
pressure gauge, it shows the engine
oil pressure in kPa (kilopascals)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running.
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Oil pressure may vary with engine
speed, outside temperature, and oil
viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil
pressure light will come on. See
Engine Oil Pressure Light on
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
Metric
page 5‑25 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-16
Instruments and Controls
Engine Coolant
Safety Belt Reminders
Temperature Gauge
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
There is a driver safety belt
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
English
This gauge shows the engine
coolant temperature. If the engine
coolant overheats, the engine
coolant temperature warning light
comes on. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Light on
page 5‑24 and Engine Overheating
on page 10‑24 for more information.
When the engine is started, this light
comes on and a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver
to fasten the safety belt, unless the
driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light flashes for
several seconds, then comes on
solid for several more.
Metric
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-17
If the driver safety belt is already
buckled, neither the light nor the
chime comes on.
The front passenger safety belt
warning light and chime may turn
on if an object such as a briefcase,
handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
or other electronic device is put on
the seat . To turn off the warning
light and/or chime, remove the
object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
The airbag readiness light comes on
and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started. Then
the light goes out.
Airbag Readiness Light
WARNING
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring, and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 3‑30.
{
Several seconds after the engine
is started, a chime sounds for a
number of seconds to remind the
front passenger to buckle their
safety belt. The passenger safety
belt light comes on and stays on for
several seconds, flashes for several
more seconds, and then comes on
solid for several more.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
This cycle repeats if the passenger
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-18
Instruments and Controls
several seconds as a system check.
If the vehicle has remote start, and
it is being used to start the vehicle
from a distance, you may not see
the system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol, to let
you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both
status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or
the passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑37 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
WARNING
{
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5‑17 for more
information, including important
safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the outboard
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate).
United States
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the outboard front
passenger frontal airbag.
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light the words ON and OFF,
or the symbols for on and off, for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-19
When this light comes on, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) also
Charging System Light
displays a message.
See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑31.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
This light should come on when the
ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
It should go out when the engine is
started.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-20
Instruments and Controls
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
If the light continues to flash,
when it is safe to do so, stop the
vehicle. Find a safe place to park
the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off,
wait at least 10 seconds, and
restart the engine. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps
and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Notice: If the vehicle is
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement
of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to
fully installed. See Filling the
Tank on page 9‑50. The
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-21
.
Make sure the electrical
If none of the above have made
the light turn off, your dealer
system is not wet. The system
could be wet if the vehicle was
driven through a deep puddle of
water. The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
can check the vehicle. The dealer
has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
The DLC is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs
to inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system
test equipment is connected
to the vehicle’s Data Link
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.
The malfunction indicator
lamp is on with the engine
running, or if the light does not
come on when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN while the
engine is off.
Connector (DLC).
If one or more of these
.
The critical emission
conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper
fuel to turn the light off.
control systems have not
been completely diagnosed
by the system. This can
happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or
if the battery has run down.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-22
Instruments and Controls
The diagnostic system evaluates
critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can
take several days of routine
driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not
pass the inspection, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
CAUTION
{
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.
Metric
English
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is placed in
ON/RUN. If it does not come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready
to warn if there is a problem.
Brake System Warning
Light
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need
to be working
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light also comes on
when the parking brake is set.
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this red brake warning
light comes on when the park brake
is applied. If the light continues
flashing after the park brake is
released, or while driving, there is a
problem with the Electric Parking
Brake system.
The light flashes or stays on if the
parking brake is not fully released.
If the light stays on after the parking
brake is fully released, there is a
base brake problem.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, see your
dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-23
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Electric Park
Brake (EPB), this park brake status
light should come on briefly when
ignition is placed in ON/RUN. If it
does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for all brake related DIC
messages.
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
Up-Shift Light
If this park brake light comes on,
there is a problem with a system on
the vehicle that is causing the park
brake system to work at a reduced
level. The vehicle can still be driven,
but should be taken to a dealer
If the ABS light stays on, turn the
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. A chime may also sound when
the light comes on steady. If this
happens, start the engine again to
reset the system. If the ABS light
stays on, or comes on again while
driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
See Brake Assist (Except CTS-V)
on page 9‑37 for more information.
The vehicle may have an up-shift
light. It indicates when to shift to
the next higher gear for best fuel
economy.
See Manual Transmission on
page 9‑31 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-24
Instruments and Controls
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights
function as a performance up-shift
light.
If the light comes on or stays on
while driving, there may be a
problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak
and the vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the
system does not limit wheel spin.
Adjust driving accordingly.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light then goes off.
The tracers flash to indicate when
to shift to the next higher gear to
avoid the engine speed limit.
See Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑26 or Manual Transmission
on page 9‑31 for more information.
If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, the vehicle may have
a problem with the cooling system.
Stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine to avoid damage to the
engine. A warning chime sounds
when this light is on.
See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 9‑38 and StabiliTrak®
System on page 9‑39 for more
information.
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑24 for more information.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Light
The Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak warning light should
come on briefly when the engine is
started.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
The engine coolant temperature
warning light comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light then goes off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Pressure Light
5-25
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
WARNING
{
Do not keep driving if the oil
A tire pressure message can
accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑44 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72 for
more information.
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
The oil pressure light should come
on briefly as the engine is started.
If it does not come on have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
This indicates that there may be a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑75 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-26
Instruments and Controls
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6‑2 for more
information.
Security Light
Lamps On Reminder
Front Fog Lamp Light
This light flashes when the security
system is activated.
This light comes on whenever the
parking lamps are on.
For more information, see Vehicle
Security on page 2‑25.
See Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
on page 6‑2 for more information.
The front fog lamp light comes on
when the fog lamps are in use.
High-Beam On Light
The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
information.
The high-beam on light comes on
when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-27
If a problem is detected, a warning
message appears on the display. All
messages should be taken seriously
and clearing the message does not
correct the problem.
Cruise Control Light
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
provides status of many vehicle
systems. The DIC displays warning/
status messages. The DIC display
is at the bottom of the instrument
panel cluster. The DIC buttons are
on the instrument panel next to the
steering wheel.
DIC Operation and Displays
This light comes on whenever the
cruise control is active.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑41 for more
information.
The DIC comes on when the ignition
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
displays the information that was
last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display
shows the DIC information. The
bottom line shows the compass.
The compass displays in the
trip/fuel menus and in some
vehicle information menus.
Press the DIC buttons to access the
different displays.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scroll
through the trip and fuel displays.
See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items”
following for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-28
Instruments and Controls
Trip A or Trip B
If the fuel is low, the Fuel Level Low
message displays. See “Fuel Level
Low” under Fuel System Messages
on page 5‑36 for more information.
T (Vehicle Information): Press
to scroll through the vehicle
information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items”
following for more information.
Displays the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each
trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers
can be used at the same time.
Reset each trip odometer to zero by
pressing and holding the set/reset
button when Trip A or Trip B is
displayed.
AVG (Average) Economy
U (Customization): Press
to scroll through each of the
customization features. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑46 for
more information.
Displays the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). The
calculation is based on the number
of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since
the last time this display was reset.
Press the set/reset button to reset
to zero.
Fuel Range
V (Set/Reset): Press to reset
certain DIC features and to
acknowledge and clear DIC
warning messages.
Displays the approximate remaining
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) you
can drive without refilling the fuel
tank. This estimate is based on the
current driving conditions and
changes if the driving conditions
change. For example, freeway
driving may produce better fuel
economy than city driving with
frequent stops, so the range would
adjust for that.
Timer
y z (Menu Up/Down): Press to
Can be used to measure time. For
example, timing how long it takes to
travel from one point to another. To
access the timer, press the trip/fuel
button until Timer 00:00:00 displays.
scroll up and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to display
the following menu items:
To turn on the timer, press the
set/reset button.
Odometer
Displays the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km).
Once the range drops below about
30 miles (48 km) remaining, the
display shows Low Range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-29
To turn off the timer, press the
set/reset button again. The timer
displays the end timing value.
Speedometer
When the oil life is depleted, the
Change Engine Oil Soon message
displays. Change the oil as soon as
possible. Additional maintenance
is also recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 and
Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
Displays a digital speedometer in
the DIC. The speed displays in
either miles per hour (mph) or
kilometers per hour (km/h). To
change the units from English to
metric, see “Units” later in this
section.
To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold the set/reset button.
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy
Displays the current fuel economy
in either liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per
gallon (mpg). This number
changes frequently as driving
conditions change. It cannot be
reset.
Blank Display
The Oil Life must be reset after
each oil change. Avoid accidental
resetting of the Oil Life system.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, See Engine
Oil Life System on page 10‑14.
The system is reset when
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Display
Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press
to display the following menu items:
AVG (Average) Speed
Displays the average speed of the
vehicle in either kilometers per
hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
This calculation is based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this display.
Press the set/reset button to reset
to zero.
Oil Life Remaining
100% displays.
If the vehicle has this display,
it shows the estimated oil life
remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life
Remaining on the display, that
means that 99% of the current oil
life remains.
Units
Select to display English or
Metric units of measure. Press the
set/reset button to select when units
is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-30
Instruments and Controls
Parking Assist
information button again until the
DIC displays Rear Tire kPa (PSI)
Left ## Right ##.
Calibrate Compass
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this display allows the system to
be turned on or off. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button
to select between On or Off. The
URPA system automatically turns
back on after each vehicle start.
When the URPA system is turned
off and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park), the DIC displays the
Parking Assist Off message as a
reminder that the system has been
turned off. See Object Detection
System Messages on page 5‑40
and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑43 for more information.
The vehicle may have this feature.
The compass can be manually
calibrated. To calibrate the compass
through the DIC, see “DIC
If a low tire pressure condition
is detected by the system while
driving, a message advises to add
air to a specific tire displays. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72 and
Tire Messages on page 5‑44 for
more information.
Compass” later in this section.
Change Compass Zone
The vehicle may have this feature.
To change the compass zone
through the DIC, see “DIC
Battery Voltage
Compass” later in this section.
This display shows the current
battery voltage. The vehicle's
charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery.
The battery voltage may fluctuate
when viewing this information on the
DIC. This is normal.
Trans (Transmission) Temp
(Temperature) (CTS-V Only)
This display shows the transmission
fluid temperature in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C).
Tire Pressure
If there is a problem with the
battery charging system, the
Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)
Tire pressure is displayed in
This display shows the oil pressure
in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
the DIC for each tire in either
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi). Press the vehicle
information button until the DIC
displays Front Tire kPa (PSI)
Left ## Right ##. Press the vehicle
charging system light illuminates
and/or the DIC displays a message.
See Charging System Light on
page 5‑19, Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages on page 5‑31
and Battery Load Management on
page 6‑6 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-31
Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only)
Battery Voltage and
Charging Messages
Vehicle Messages
Lateral Acceleration measures the
force of a turn or corner. For
example, when turning right, it
forces to the left. This gauge
displays the “g” force from 0.0 g
to 2.0 g.
Messages displayed on the DIC
indicate the status of the vehicle
or some action may be needed
to correct a condition. Multiple
messages may appear one after
another.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the
system detects that the battery
voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system
starts reducing certain features of
the vehicle that may be noticeable.
At the point that the features are
disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
Blank Display
The messages that do not
require immediate action can be
acknowledged and cleared by
This display shows no information.
DIC Compass
pressing V (Set/Reset).
The vehicle may have a compass in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Compass on page 5‑7 for
information.
The messages that require
immediate action cannot be cleared
until that action is performed.
Turn off all unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
All messages should be taken
seriously and clearing the message
does not correct the problem.
The normal battery voltage range
is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by
pressing the vehicle information
button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
The following are the possible
messages and some information
about them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-32
Instruments and Controls
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts. Monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the
vehicle information button until
Battery Voltage is displayed.
BATTERY VOLTS LOW
Brake System Messages
This message displays when the
electrical system is charging less
than 10 volts or the battery has
been drained.
PARK BRAKE RELEASED
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays when the parking brake
has been released from the set
position. See the Electric Parking
Brake information under Parking
Brake (Manual) on page 9‑34
or Parking Brake (Electric) on
page 9‑35 for more information.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
If this message appears
immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the
generator can still recharge the
battery. The battery should recharge
while driving, but may take a few
hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the
battery after returning home or
to a final destination. Make sure
you follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the generator and
battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain the
battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Have the electrical system
checked by your dealer. Under
certain conditions, the charging
system light may also turn on in
the instrument panel cluster.
PARK BRAKE SET
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays when the parking brake
has been applied to the set position.
See the Electric Parking Brake
information under Parking Brake
(Manual) on page 9‑34 or Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 9‑35 for
more information.
If this message appears while
driving or after starting the vehicle
and stays on, have it checked
immediately to determine the cause
of this problem.
See Charging System Light on
page 5‑19 for more information.
To help the generator recharge the
battery quickly, reduce the load on
the electrical system by turning off
the accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-33
PRESS BRAKE TO START
ENGINE (AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION ONLY)
SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if there is
a problem with the brake system.
The brake system warning light and
the antilock brake system (ABS)
warning light may also display on
the instrument panel cluster. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22 and Antilock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light on
page 5‑23 for more information.
Stop as soon as possible and turn
off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message displays
immediately or again after you begin
driving, the brake system needs
service. See your dealer as soon
as possible. See Antilock Brake
System (ABS) on page 9‑33 for
more information.
This message displays, while the
ignition is on, when the brake fluid
level is low. The brake system
warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22 for more information. This
message may also be displayed for
other brake system problems. Have
the brake system serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if you try to start the engine
without having the brake pressed.
The brake needs to be pressed
when starting the engine. See
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
more information.
SERVICE PARK BRAKE
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
SWITCH
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if a problem is detected
with the electric parking brake
system. See your dealer for service.
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if the Park Brake switch is
pulled while the vehicle is moving.
See the Electric Parking Brake
information under Parking Brake
(Manual) on page 9‑34 or Parking
Brake (Electric) on page 9‑35 for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-34
Instruments and Controls
STEP ON BRAKE TO
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
RELEASE PARK BRAKE
This message displays when the
compass calibration is complete.
See Compass on page 5‑7 for more
information.
This message displays when the
driver side rear door is not closed
completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
For vehicles with the Electric
Parking Brake, this message
displays if you try to release the
park brake system without first
pressing the brake pedal. See the
Electric Parking Brake information
under Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35 for more
information.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
Cruise Control Messages
This message displays when the
passenger side front door is not
closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.
CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH
(KM/H)
This message displays whenever
the cruise control is set. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑41 for more
information.
REAR ACCESS OPEN (Wagon)
This message displays when the
liftgate is not closed completely.
Make sure that the liftgate is closed
completely.
Compass Messages
CALIBRATING DRIVE IN
CIRCLES
Door Ajar Messages
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when
calibrating the compass. Drive the
vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph
(8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
See Compass on page 5‑7 for more
information.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the
driver door is not closed completely.
Close the door completely.
This message displays when the
passenger side rear door is not
closed completely. Make sure that
the door is closed completely.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays when the
hood is not closed completely.
Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-35
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 10‑25 for
information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
TRUNK OPEN
(Sedan and Coupe)
This message displays when the
trunk is not closed completely.
Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine is overheating,
severe engine damage may
occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Do not increase the engine
Engine Cooling System
Messages
When this message displays, it
means that service is required
for the vehicle. See your dealer.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 and Engine Oil on
page 10‑10 for more information.
ENGINE HOT A/C (AIR
CONDITIONING) OFF
This message displays when the
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge on page 5‑16. To avoid
added strain on a hot engine,
the air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the
coolant temperature returns to
normal, the air conditioning
When you reset the Change Engine
Oil Soon message by clearing it
from the display, you still must reset
the engine oil life system separately.
For more information on resetting
the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on
speed above normal idling speed.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10‑24 for more information.
This message displays when the
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. If the
message does not clear in a few
minutes or if the overheat light stays
on, shut the vehicle off and have
it serviced before driving again.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light on page 5‑24.
page 10‑14.
compressor turns back on. You
can continue to drive the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-36
Instruments and Controls
pressure is corrected. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑10 for more
information.
If this message is on, but there
is no reduction in performance,
proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be
reduced. Anytime this message
stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor,
this message displays if the oil level
in the vehicle is low. Check the oil
level and correct it as necessary.
You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears.
This message displays when the
vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
The oil pressure light may also
appear on the instrument panel
cluster. See Engine Oil Pressure
Light on page 5‑25. See Engine Oil
on page 10‑10 for more information.
This message clears itself after
10 seconds, until the next ignition
cycle. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10 for additional
information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as
engine damage can result from
driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer as soon as possible
when this message is displayed.
Fuel System Messages
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel
tank as soon as possible. A chime
may sound when this message
displays. See Filling the Tank on
page 9‑50.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure
is low, severe engine damage
may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the
instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the
engine power is being reduced to
protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions
that might cause this message.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-37
information for Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7 for more information.
Try moving the keyless access
transmitter away from these
devices when starting the
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays when
the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on and tightened
properly.
vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate
openers may also generate
Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the
keyless access transmitter. Do
not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or
bag as these devices.
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT
DETECTED
Key and Lock Messages
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
ACCESSORY MODE ACTIVE
If the vehicle has the keyless
displays if the vehicle does not
detect the presence of a transmitter
when you have attempted to start
the vehicle or a vehicle door has
just closed. The following conditions
may cause this message to appear:
access system, this message
displays when the accessory mode
is active. See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑18 for more information.
.
The vehicle is experiencing
Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths,
and some gas stations have EMI
fields which may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter.
.
Driver-added equipment plugged
ELECTRONIC KEY ALREADY
KNOWN
into the accessory power outlet
on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these
devices are cell phones and cell
phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if you try to match a
transmitter that has already been
learned. See the Keyless Access
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-38
Instruments and Controls
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT
DETECTED RESTART
ALLOWED
LEARN DELAY ACTIVE WAIT
XX MIN (MINUTES)
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See
the Keyless Access information
for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle while you are trying to turn
the ignition off. The vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal
causing the keyless access system
to be jammed. If you have the
keyless access transmitter with
you, get out of the vehicle and lock
the doors. If you do not have the
keyless access transmitter with you,
you will be able to start the vehicle
again within five minutes, or until the
vehicle's content theft deterrent
system is armed. See Starting the
Engine on page 9‑19 for more
information.
If moving the transmitter to
different locations within the
vehicle does not help, place the
transmitter in the center console
transmitter pocket with the
buttons facing the front of the
vehicle and then start the
vehicle.
MAXIMUM # ELECTRONIC
KEYS LEARNED
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the maximum
number of transmitters have been
learned. See the Keyless Access
information for Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation (Key
Access) on page 2‑5 or Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Keyless Access) on
page 2‑7 for more information.
.
The vehicle's battery voltage is
low. The battery voltage must
be above 10 volts for the
keyless access transmitter
to be detected properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-39
PRESS START CONTROL TO
LEARN KEYS
REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
SERVICE KEYLESS START
SYSTEM
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
This message displays when the
battery in the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) or keyless access
transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see
“Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when there is a problem
with this feature. See your dealer.
Lamp Messages
AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD
LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED
SERVICE
This message displays when the
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system is disabled and needs
service. See your dealer. See
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on
page 6‑4 for more information.
READY TO LEARN
ELECTRONIC KEY # X
ROTATE CONTROL TO OFF
POSITION
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays while matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays when the ignition is in
ACC/ACCESSORY and the shift
lever has just been moved to
P (Park). The message displays as
a reminder to turn the ignition off.
To avoid draining the battery, make
sure the ignition is turned off before
leaving the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-40
Instruments and Controls
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
Object Detection System
Messages
Ride Control System
Messages
This message displays when
the automatic headlamps are
turned off.
PARKING ASSIST OFF
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
after the vehicle has been started,
this message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has
been turned off. Press the set/reset
button to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
To turn the URPA system back on,
see “Parking Assist” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
If the vehicle has the All-Wheel
Drive (AWD) system, this message
displays when there is a temporary
condition making the AWD system
unavailable. The vehicle will run
in 2WD. This could be caused by:
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
This message displays when the
automatic headlamps are turned on.
.
Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
TURN SIGNAL ON
.
AWD system overheat
This message displays as a
reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive the vehicle for
more than about 1.6 km (1 mile)
with a turn signal on. A multiple
chime sounds when this message
displays.
.
Certain vehicle electrical
conditions
page 5‑27. See Ultrasonic Parking
Assist on page 9‑43 for more
information.
This message turns off when the
above conditions are no longer
present and by resetting the
warning message.
SERVICE PARKING ASSIST
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑43 for more information. See
your dealer for service.
To reset the warning message, turn
the ignition off and then back on
again after 30 seconds. If the
message stays on, see your dealer
right away. See All-Wheel Drive on
page 9‑33 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
SERVICE SUSPENSION
5-41
notice that the effort required to
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
steer the vehicle increases or feels
heavier, but you will still be able to
steer the vehicle. See Steering on
page 9‑4.
SYSTEM
This message displays if a problem
occurs with the All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) system. The vehicle will run
in 2WD. This could be caused by:
This message displays when there
is a problem with the Magnetic Ride
Control system. See Magnetic Ride
Control on page 9‑40 for more
information. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
.
An electronics problem
This message displays if there
has been a problem detected
with the StabiliTrak® system. The
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on
the instrument panel cluster also
comes on.
.
An AWD system oil overheat
.
Worn out or overheated clutch
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
plates
.
Various electrical issues
This message displays when
there is a problem with the
If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again
when you begin driving, the system
needs service. See your dealer
right away.
If this message comes on while you
are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the
ignition off then back on. If this
message still stays on or comes
back on again while you are driving,
the vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak system inspected by
your dealer as soon as possible.
See StabiliTrak® System on
Traction Control System (TCS). The
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the
instrument panel cluster also comes
on. When this message displays,
the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
your dealer for service. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 9‑38
for more information.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays if a problem
is detected with the speed variable
assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may
page 9‑39 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-42
Instruments and Controls
.
.
The message could display
if the stability system takes
longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving
conditions.
STABILITRAK
COMPETITIVE MODE
STABILITRAK OFF
This message displays when
you turn off StabiliTrak, or when
the stability control has been
automatically disabled. The
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on
the instrument panel cluster also
comes on.
This message displays when
the Competitive Driving mode is
selected. When in this mode,
the Traction Control System (TCS)
will not be operating and the TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light will turn on.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See
“Competitive Driving Mode” under
Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 9‑38 for more information.
The message displays if an
engine or vehicle related
problem has been detected
and the vehicle needs service.
See your dealer.
To realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you
should normally leave StabiliTrak
on. To turn the StabiliTrak system
on or off, see StabiliTrak® System
on page 9‑39.
The message turns off as soon as
the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
longer present.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display after first
driving the vehicle and exceeding
30 km/h (19 mph) for 30 seconds.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
on the instrument panel cluster also
comes on. The StabiliTrak system is
not functional until the message has
turned off. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 9‑39 for more information.
SUSPENSION MODE SPORT
(CTS-V ONLY)
There are several conditions that
can cause this message to appear.
.
One condition is overheating,
This message will be displayed
when sport mode is selected using
the Magnetic Ride Control button in
the center of the instrument panel.
See Magnetic Ride Control on
page 9‑40 for more information.
which could occur if StabiliTrak
activates continuously for an
extended period of time.
.
The message also displays if
the brake system warning light is
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-43
SUSPENSION MODE TOUR
(CTS-V ONLY)
START ABORTED BY THEFT
DETERRENT
Anti-Theft Alarm System
Messages
This message will be displayed
when touring mode is selected
using the Magnetic Ride Control
button in the center of the
instrument panel. See Magnetic
Ride Control on page 9‑40 for more
information.
This message displays if there is a
communication problem between
the keyless access system and
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be
started when this message displays.
See your dealer for service.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
SYSTEM
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system programmed in the key.
A fault has been detected in the
system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle
usually restarts; however, you may
want to take the vehicle to your
dealer before turning off the
engine. See Immobilizer Operation
(Key Access) on page 2‑26 or
Immobilizer Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑27 for more
information.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the
theft-deterrent system has detected
a break-in attempt while you were
away from the vehicle. See
Anti-Theft Alarm System on
page 2‑25 for more information.
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays when there
is a problem with the airbag system.
Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer immediately. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑17 for
more information.
Service Vehicle Messages
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays when the
electronic sensors that control the
air conditioning and heating
systems are no longer working.
Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer if you
notice a drop in heating and air
conditioning efficiency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-44
Instruments and Controls
If a tire pressure message appears
on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on
page 10‑64, Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11, and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when a
non-emissions related malfunction
occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays when the
Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is re-learning the tire
positions on the vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on
page 10‑79, Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 10‑74, and Tire
Pressure on page 10‑72 for more
information.
Tire Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
SYSTEM
If the vehicle does not have a spare
tire, the message will display “Use
Inflator Kit in Trunk”. Use the inflator
kit to inflate the tires to the correct
pressure. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑89 for
more information.
This message displays if a part on
the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is not working properly.
The tire pressure light also flashes
and then remains on during the
same ignition cycle. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
Several conditions may cause
this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑75 for more information.
If the warning comes on and stays
on, there may be a problem with the
TPMS. See your dealer.
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle’s tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate the location of the
low tire.
More than one tire pressure
message can be received at a
time. To read the other messages,
press the set/reset button.
The DIC display also shows the
tire pressure values. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27.
The low tire pressure warning
light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 5‑24.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
SPORT MODE
5-45
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
Transmission Messages
This message displays when there
is a problem with the vehicle's
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
This message displays when the
vehicle is in sport mode. The
DIFFERENTIAL HOT, REDUCE
SPEED (CTS-V ONLY)
transmission gear position will also
be displayed when DSC is in use.
See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)”
under Automatic Transmission on
page 9‑26 for more information.
This message displays and a
chime sounds if the differential
fluid temperature exceeds 150°C
(300°F). Driving aggressively or
at high speeds can cause the
differential fluid temperature to be
higher than normal. If this message
appears, you may continue to drive
at a slower speed. If you have been
operating the vehicle under normal
driving conditions, the vehicle may
need service. See your dealer for an
inspection.
SHIFT TO PARK (AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION ONLY)
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this message
displays if the vehicle is not in
P (Park) while the engine is being
turned off. The vehicle will be in
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift
lever is moved to P (Park), the
ignition needs to be turned off. If the
ignition is not turned off, the vehicle
will remain in ACC/ACCESSORY.
To avoid draining the battery, turn
the ignition to off before leaving the
vehicle.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
ENGINE
This message displays when the
transmission fluid in the vehicle is
too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it
to idle until the transmission cools
down or until this message is
removed.
To acknowledge the message,
Vehicle Speed Messages
press V. The message reappears
and a chime sounds every
two minutes until this condition
changes. If you do not clear the
message, it will remain on until the
condition changes.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when the
outside temperature is cold enough
to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-46
Instruments and Controls
2. Press the customization
button to enter the feature
settings menu.
SPEED LIMITED TO
XXX KM/H (MPH)
Vehicle
Personalization
Vehicle customization allows certain
features to be programmed for one
preferred setting.
This message displays when the
vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h
(80 mph) because the vehicle
detects a problem in the speed
variable assist steering, magnetic
ride control, or automatic leveling
control systems. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization
features that allow you to program
settings to the vehicle:
Only the customization options
available will be displayed on
the DIC.
Display In English
This feature will only display if a
language other than English has
been set. This feature allows for
changing the language of the DIC
messages back to English.
The default settings were preset
when the vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed.
Washer Fluid Messages
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
Press the customization button until
This message displays when the
vehicle is low on windshield washer
fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible.
See Washer Fluid on page 10‑26 for
more information.
To change customization
preferences, use the following
procedure.
the Press V To Display In English
screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to
select English as the language in
which all DIC messages will appear.
Entering the Feature
Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on.
Display Language
To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that
the headlamps are turned off.
This feature allows you to select
the language in which the DIC
messages will appear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-47
Press the customization button
until the Display Language screen
appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to
scroll through the following settings:
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
At Vehicle Speed (default on
Manual Transmission): The
vehicle's doors automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above
5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Auto Door Lock
English (default): All messages
will appear in English.
This feature allows you to select
when the vehicle's doors will
automatically lock. See Automatic
Door Locks on page 2‑17 for more
information.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Deutsch: All messages will appear
in German.
Italiano: All messages will appear
in Italian.
Auto Door Unlock
Press the customization button
until Auto Door Lock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
This feature allows you to select
whether or not the door(s) will
automatically unlock. It also allows
you to select which doors and when
they will automatically unlock. See
Automatic Door Locks on page 2‑17
for more information.
Francais: All messages will appear
in French.
Espanol: All messages will appear
in Spanish.
Portugese: All messages will
appear in Portugese.
Shift Out Of Park (default on
Automatic Transmission)
(Automatic Transmission Only):
The vehicle's doors automatically
lock when the doors are closed and
the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Arabic: All messages will appear in
Arabic.
Chinese: All messages will appear
in Chinese.
Japanese: All messages will
appear in Japanese.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-48
Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button until
Auto Door Unlock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until
Remote Door Lock appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Remote Door Lock Feedback
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or
keyless access transmitter, or when
the vehicle is automatically locked
using the Keyless Locking feature.
You will not receive feedback
when locking the vehicle with the
transmitter if the doors are open.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 or “Keyless
Locking” later in this section for
more information.
Off: None of the doors will
automatically unlock.
Off: There will be no feedback
when you press the lock button on
the transmitter.
Driver Only At Off: Only the driver
door will unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
Lights Only: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock
button on the transmitter.
All At Off (default on Manual
Transmission): All of the doors
will unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
Horn Only: The horn will sound on
the second press of the lock button
on the transmitter.
All In Park (default on Automatic
Transmission) (Automatic
Transmission Only): All of the
doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into P (Park).
Horn & Lights (default): The
exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the
transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed
again within five seconds of the
previous command.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-49
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until
Press the customization button
Remote Door Unlock appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
until Exit Lighting appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Remote Door Unlock Feedback
This feature allows you to select the
type of feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or
keyless access transmitter, or
when the vehicle is automatically
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock
feature. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the
vehicle with the transmitter if the
doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
Lights Off: The exterior lamps will
not flash when you press the unlock
button on the transmitter.
Off: The exterior lamps will not
turn on.
10 Seconds (default): The exterior
lamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
Lights On (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the
unlock button on the transmitter.
30 Seconds: The exterior lamps
will stay on for 30 seconds.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will
stay on for two minutes.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 or “Keyless
Unlock” later in this section for more
information.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Exit Lighting
This feature allows you to select
the amount of time you want the
exterior lamps to remain on when
it is dark enough outside. This
happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-50
Instruments and Controls
Approach Lighting
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑7 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
No Change: The customization
features will not be set to their
factory default settings.
This feature allows you to select
whether or not to have the exterior
lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle
using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) or keyless access transmitter.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Keyless Locking
Press the customization button until
Approach Lighting appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal
vehicle exit. When the ignition is
turned off and all doors become
closed, the vehicle will determine
how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle
interior. If at least one keyless
access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the
vehicle, the doors will lock after
several seconds.
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Factory Settings
This feature allows you to set all of
the customization features back to
their factory default settings.
Off: The exterior lights will not turn
on when you unlock the vehicle with
the transmitter.
Press the customization button until
Factory Settings appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
On (default): If it is dark enough
outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the
vehicle with the transmitter.
The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button
on the transmitter is pressed, or
the vehicle is no longer off. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Restore All (default): The
customization features will be set
to their factory default settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-51
For example, if there are
To select whether the horn sounds
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
two keyless access transmitters in
the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless
access transmitter locked in the
vehicle can still be used to start
the vehicle or unlock the doors,
if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle
without an authorized keyless
access transmitter, however, will
not be able to open the door, even
with a transmitter in the vehicle.
See the Keyless Access information
for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
or the lights flash when the vehicle
is locked, see “Remote Door Lock”
earlier in this section.
Keyless Unlock
Press the customization button until
Keyless Locking appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, this feature allows
you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you
approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver door. See the
Keyless Access information for
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
Off (default): The keyless locking
feature will be disabled.
On: The keyless locking feature will
be enabled.
The doors will automatically lock
several seconds after you turn
the ignition off, remove a keyless
access transmitter from the interior
of the vehicle, and close all of the
doors.
To select whether the lights flash
when the vehicle is unlocked, see
“Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this
section.
You may temporarily disable
the keyless locking feature by
pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. To
enable keyless locking, transition
the power mode from off.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-52
Instruments and Controls
Press the customization button
until Keyless Unlock appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Chime Volume
Entry/Exit Recall
This feature allows you to select the
volume level of the chime.
If the vehicle has this feature, it
allows you to select your preferred
automatic recall of stored memory
and exit positions. See the “Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Steering Column”
information under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑5 for more
information.
Press the customization button
until Chime Volume appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Entry Door Only: Only the driver
door will automatically unlock when
you approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver door.
Press the customization button until
Entry/Exit Recall appears on the
DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the
menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings.
Normal: The chime volume will be
set to a normal level.
All Doors (default): All doors will
automatically unlock when you
approach the vehicle with the
keyless access transmitter and
open the driver door.
Loud: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
There is no default for chime
volume. The volume will stay at the
last known setting.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the
set/reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-53
Entry/Exit Recall Off (default):
No automatic Entry/Exit Recall will
occur when entering or leaving the
vehicle. The Exit recall will only
occur after pressing the door
mounted EXIT button. This button
will cause the drivers seat to move
rearward a certain distance, and the
steering column to move full up
and full forward, if equipped. Entry
Recall will only occur by pressing
the door mounted “1” or “2” button.
Easy Entry will automatically recall
the driver seat and outside mirror
memory positions of the current
driver (1 or 2) when the ignition is
turned on.
Easy Entry will automatically
recall the driver seat, outside
mirrors and steering column
memory positions of the current
driver (1 or 2) when the ignition
is turned on.
Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicles
with Power Tilt Steering Wheel):
If this setting is selected the
following two options will be
available.
.
Entry/Exit Steering Only:
Easy Exit will automatically
move the steering column to a
full up and full forward position
when the key is removed from
the ignition on Key Access
vehicles, or when the ignition is
turned off and the driver door
opened on Keyless Access
vehicles. This movement will
also occur when the door
.
Entry/Exit Steering and Seat:
Easy Exit will automatically
move the steering column to a
full up and full forward position
and move the driver seat
rearward a certain distance
when the key is removed from
the ignition on Key Access
vehicles, or when the ignition is
turned off and the driver door
opened on Keyless Access
vehicles. These movements
will also occur when the door
mounted EXIT button is pressed.
Entry/Exit Recall On (Vehicles
without Power Tilt Steering
Wheel): If this setting is selected
the following option will be available.
Easy Exit will automatically move
the driver seat rearward a certain
distance when the key is removed
from the ignition on Key Access
vehicles, or when the ignition is
turned off and the driver door
opened on Keyless Access
vehicles. This movement will also
occur when the door mounted EXIT
button is pressed.
mounted EXIT button is pressed.
Easy Entry will automatically
recall the driver seat, outside
mirrors and steering column
memory positions of the current
driver (1 or 2) when the ignition
is turned on.
No Change: No change will be
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-54
Instruments and Controls
Do not use the Universal Home
Remote with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes
any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Exiting the Feature
Settings Menu
Universal Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
The feature settings menu will be
exited when any of the following
occurs:
.
The vehicle is no longer in
Read the instructions completely
before attempting to program the
Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be
helpful to have another person
available to assist you with
programming the Universal Home
Remote.
ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
information DIC buttons are
pressed.
Universal Remote System
Programming
.
The end of the feature settings
menu is reached and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has
Keep the original hand-held
transmitter for use in other vehicles
as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this
section.
elapsed with no selection made.
This system provides a way to
replace up to three remote control
transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door
openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-55
When programming a garage door,
park outside of the garage. Park
directly in line with and facing the
garage door opener motor-head or
gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
To program up to three devices:
2. Hold the end of your hand-held
transmitter about 3 to 8 cm
(1 to 3 inches) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held
transmitter was supplied by the
manufacturer of your garage
door opener receiver (motor
head unit).
It is recommended that a new
battery be installed in your
hand-held transmitter for quicker
and more accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
1. From inside the vehicle, press
and hold down the two outside
buttons at the same time,
3. At the same time, press and
hold both the Universal Home
Remote button to be used to
control the garage door and the
hand-held transmitter button. Do
not release the Universal Home
Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until Step 4
has been completed.
releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds. This step will
erase the factory settings or all
previously programmed buttons.
Programming the Universal
Home Remote System
For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do
not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
Some entry gates and garage
door openers may require
substitution of Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate
Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this
section.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so
read the entire procedure before
starting. Otherwise, the device will
time out and the procedure will have
to be repeated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-56
Instruments and Controls
.
If the Universal Home
Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then
turns to a constant
light, continue with the
programming Steps 6
through 8.
4. The indicator light on the
Universal Home Remote will
flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home
Remote successfully receives
the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
“Smart” button. The name and
color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
7. Firmly press and release the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. After
you press this button, you will
have 30 seconds to complete
Step 8.
It may be helpful to have
another person assist with
the remaining steps.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained
Universal Home Remote button
and observe the indicator light.
8. Immediately return to the
vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the Universal Home Remote
button, selected in Step 3 to
control the garage door, for
two seconds, and then release
it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the
.
If the indicator light stays
on continuously, the
programming is complete
and the garage door should
move when the Universal
Home Remote button is
pressed and released.
There is no need to
same button a second time for
two seconds, and then release
it. Again, if the door does not
move, press and hold the
continue programming
Steps 6 through 8.
same button a third time for
two seconds, and then release.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have
been completed, locate inside
the garage the garage door
opener receiver (motor-head
unit). Locate the “Learn” or
The Universal Home Remote
should now activate the
garage door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
5-57
To program the remaining two
Universal Home Remote buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote
System.” Do not repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal
Home Remote buttons.
If you live in Canada, or you are
having difficulty programming a
gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming
Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under
“Programming Universal Home
Remote” with the following:
The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at
first and then rapidly. Proceed
with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to
complete the training procedure.
Universal Remote System
Operation
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Continue to press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button
while you press and release
every two seconds (cycle) the
hand-held transmitter button until
the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote.
Using Universal Remote
If you have questions or need
help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call
1-800-355-3515 or go to
www.homelink.com.
Press and hold the appropriate
Universal Remote button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws
require transmitter signals to time
out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be
long enough for Universal Home
Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S.
gate operators are manufactured to
time out in the same manner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-58
Instruments and Controls
Erasing Universal Remote
Buttons
Reprogramming a Single
Universal Remote Button
All programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
the lease ends.
To reprogram any of the three
Universal Remote buttons, repeat
the programming instructions
earlier in this section, beginning
with Step 2.
To erase all programmed buttons on
the Universal Remote device:
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑4 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
1. Press and hold down the
two outside buttons until the
indicator light begins to flash,
after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-1
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Daytime Running
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lighting Battery
The exterior lamp control is located
toward the end of the turn signal/
lane change lever.
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn
the band with this symbol on it to
operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has
four positions:
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on and off automatically,
depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
Push the turn signal/lane change
lever away from you to turn the high
beams on. Pull the lever toward you
and then release it to return to low
beams.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature allows the high-beam
headlamps to be used to signal the
driver in front of you that you want
to pass.
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
parking lamps together with the
following:
Pull and hold the turn signal/lane
change lever toward you to use this
feature. When this is done the
following will occur:
.
Sidemarker Lamps
If the vehicle is turned off while the
highbeams are on, they will come
on the next time the vehicle is
started.
.
Taillamps
.
.
If the headlamps are off or in
License Plate Lamps
low-beam mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is
held there. Release the lever to
turn them off.
.
Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
.
If the headlamps are already in
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the
exterior lamp control is left on in
either the headlamp or parking lamp
position and the driver door is
opened with the ignition off.
high-beam mode, they will
remain on high‐beam.
This indicator light turns on in the
instrument panel cluster when the
high‐beam headlamps are on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-3
When DRLs are on, only the
reduced intensity low‐beam
headlamps or dedicated DRLs will
be on. The other exterior lamps and
the instrument panel cluster will not
be on.
Turning the exterior lamp control to
off or to the low-beam headlamp
position will turn off the DRL. If the
parking lamps or the fog lamps were
turned on instead, the DRL will still
turn off.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
When the exterior lamp control is in
AUTO and it is dark enough outside,
the DRL turns off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is
bright enough outside, the low-beam
headlamps will go off, and the
DRL will turn back on. If the vehicle
is started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes
on immediately. Once the vehicle
leaves the garage, it takes about
one minute for the automatic
This will work regardless of gear
position and whether or not the
parking brake is set.
The DRL system will make either
the reduced intensity low‐beam
headlamps or dedicated DRLs come
on when the following conditions
are met:
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamps control is in the
automatic position, the headlamps
come on automatically. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
.
It is still daylight and the ignition
is in ON/RUN or START.
.
The exterior lamp control is in off
or AUTO and the headlamps
are off.
headlamp system to change to
DRL if it is light outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual. Make
sure the instrument panel brightness
lever is in the full bright position.
See Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
The vehicle has a light sensor
located on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered,
or the headlamps will be on when
they are not needed.
.
The automatic transmission is
not in P (Park).
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Lighting
This warns others that you are
having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL)
If after signaling a turn or lane
change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out.
The Adaptive Forward Lighting
System (AFL) pivots the headlamps
horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. To enable
AFL, set the exterior lamp switch on
the multifunction lever to the AUTO
position. Moving the switch out of
the AUTO position will deactivate
the system. AFL will operate when
the vehicle speed is greater than
3 km/h (2 mph). AFL will not
operate when the transmission is in
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately
operable after starting the vehicle;
driving a short distance is required
to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 6‑1.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10‑41.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for about
1.6 km (1 mile), a warning chime will
sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON
message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
See “Turn Signal On” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
page 5‑27 for more information.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will
automatically flash three times.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| Hazard Warning Flasher:
Press this button located on the
instrument panel near the audio
system, to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Reading Lamps
6-5
Fog Lamps
Interior Lighting
Use the fog lamps for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions. The fog
lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
The reading lamps are located on
the overhead console. These lamps
come on automatically when any
door is opened.
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering
column.
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog
For manual operation, press the
button next to each lamp to turn it
on or off.
lamp band on the lever up to # and
release it, to turn the fog lamps on
or off. The band will return to its
original position.
If the reading lamps are left on, they
automatically shut off 10 minutes
after the ignition has been
turned off.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lights. Turn the
knob completely clockwise to turn
on the interior lamps.
The parking lamps must be on for
the fog lamps to work.
If the high-beam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will also
turn off. They will turn back on again
when you change back to low-beam
headlamps.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Lighting
Exit Lighting
Parade Dimming
This feature does not let the
instrument panel backlight dim
during daylight hours while the
key is in the ignition and the
headlamps are on. Parade dimming
automatically works with the light
sensor, located on top of the
dashboard. If it is dark enough
outside and the parking lamps are
on, the backlight on the instrument
panel can be adjusted by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the lighting. See
Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6‑5.
Lighting Features
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, reverse lamps, and license
plate lamps come on at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The dome lamps also come on
when the key is removed from the
ignition. The exterior lights and
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, reverse lamps, dome
lamps, and most of the interior lights
turn on briefly, when the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) K is pressed,
or when the door handle is pulled
on a Keyless Access Vehicle. See
Ignition Positions (Key Access) on
page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18.
After about 30 seconds the exterior
lamps turn off, and then the dome
and remaining interior lights will dim
to off. Entry lighting can be disabled
manually by changing the ignition
out of the OFF position, or by
For a vehicle with Keyless Access,
the exterior lights and dome lamps
automatically turn on when a door is
opened after the ignition is turned
off. See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑18.
Battery Load
Management
pressing the Remote Keyless Entry
The exterior lights turn off
immediately by turning the exterior
lamps control to OFF.
(RKE) Q button.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46.
The vehicle has Electric Power
Management (EPM) that estimates
the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
for best performance and extended
life of the battery.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 5‑46.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
6-7
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high,
the voltage is lowered slightly to
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
A high electrical load occurs when
several of the following are on, such
as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger,
climate control fan at high speed,
heated seats, engine cooling fans,
trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Normally, these actions occur in
steps or levels, without being
noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action,
this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information
Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE or BATTERY
VOLTS LOW. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that
the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
The battery can be discharged at
idle if the electrical loads are very
high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator
(alternator) may not be spinning fast
enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Lighting
Battery Power Protection
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver
This feature helps to prevent battery
drain if accessory lamps are left on.
If accessory lamps such as the
vanity mirror, cargo, reading,
console, or glove box are left on,
they automatically time-out after
about 20 minutes. To reset the
battery protection, all of the above
lamps must be turned off or the
ignition must be in the ACC/
The exterior lamps turn off about
10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking
lamps or headlamps have been left
on. This protects against draining
the battery. The battery saver does
not work if the headlamps are
turned on after the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
ACCESSORY position.
To keep the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, turn the lamps back on
with the exterior lamp control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-1
.
Set up the tone, speaker
Introduction
Infotainment
System
adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
Infotainment
Read the following pages to
become familiar with the audio
system's features.
For more information, see Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2.
Introduction
Notice: Contact your dealer
before adding any equipment.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with
the operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
WARNING
{
Radio
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do
not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑22 for more
information.
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . 7-29
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
This system provides access to
many audio and non‐audio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
Phone
.
Become familiar with the
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Infotainment System
Navigation System
Operation
For vehicles with a navigation
system, see the separate Navigation
System Manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
TheftLock® is designed to
discourage theft of the vehicle's
radio by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
stolen or moved to a different
vehicle.
Full View of Radio with CD Shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-3
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,
or Treble): To adjust bass,
midrange, or treble:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
until the tone control tabs
display.
2. Continue pressing the
TUNE/TONE knob, or press
the softkey under the desired
tab to highlight the desired tone
setting.
Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio, Hard Drive Device (HDD),
and USB
3. To increase the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
The vehicle may have one of these
radios as its audio system.
Turning the System On or Off
.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
VOL P (Volume/Power): Press
to turn the system on and off.
If the vehicle does not have one of
these radio systems, it may have a
navigation radio system. See the
Navigation System manual for more
information on the navigation audio
system.
clockwise.
.
Turn the MENU/SELECT
Volume Control
knob clockwise.
VOL P (Volume/Power): Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
.
Press the \ FWD button.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Infotainment System
4. To decrease the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
4. To decrease the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
.
.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):
To adjust balance or fade:
counterclockwise.
counterclockwise.
.
.
Turn the MENU/SELECT
knob counterclockwise.
Turn the MENU/SELECT
knob counterclockwise.
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob
until the speaker control tabs
display.
.
.
Press the s REV button.
Press the s REV button.
2. Continue pressing the TUNE/
TONE knob, or press the softkey
under the desired tab to highlight
the desired tone setting.
.
.
Press the © SEEK button.
Press the © SEEK button.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position,
press the softkey under the BASS,
MID, or TREB tab for more than
two seconds.
To quickly adjust balance or fade
to the middle position, press the
softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
for more than two seconds.
3. To increase the highlighted
setting, do one of the following:
.
To quickly adjust all speaker and
tone controls to the middle position,
press the TUNE/TONE knob for
more than two seconds.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob
To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle
position, press the TUNE/TONE
knob for more than two seconds.
clockwise.
.
Turn the MENU/SELECT
knob clockwise.
.
Press the \ FWD button.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-5
Centerpoint®: Select to enable
Bose® Centerpoint signal
.
To choose a DSP setting:
Adjusting the Equalizer (EQ)
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to
display the tone/speaker and
DSP tabs.
If the radio has this feature, the EQ
can be adjusted between talk and
manual.
processing circuitry. Centerpoint
creates a Bose® surround sound
listening experience from stereo
CDs, MP3s, and satellite radio.
As a result, vehicle owners enjoy
a surround sound listening
experience from many audio
sources. Simply turn it on, and it
operates automatically.
2. Press the softkey under the
DSP tab.
To choose an EQ setting:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob.
2. Select EQ.
3. Press the softkey below the
Back tab to return to the original
tone/speaker display, or wait for
the display to time out.
3. Select Talk or Manual.
4. Press the Back button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
This feature is not available in
AM/FM radio mode.
The DSP settings available are:
.
Normal: Select for normal mode;
Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)
If the vehicle is equipped with
the Bose 5.1 Cabin Surround
sound system, the radio can
support the playback of 5.1
surround sound DVD-A discs or
DTS 5.1 surround sound CD
discs. When a 5.1 surround
sound formatted disc is playing,
DSP options available are:
this provides the best sound
quality for all seating positions.
If the radio has this feature, it has
either a Bose® sound system or a
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound
system. DSP is used to provide
a choice of different listening
experiences.
.
Driver: Select to adjust the
audio for the driver to receive
the best possible sound quality.
.
Rear: Select to adjust the audio
for the rear seat passengers to
receive the best possible sound
quality.
‐ 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best
for all seating positions.
‐ 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for
the rear seating positions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6
Infotainment System
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.
4. Press the softkey under the
desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of
radio volume compensation.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
System Settings
CONFIG: Press to adjust the
number of favorites pages, auto
volume, XM (if equipped), and HDD
(if available) settings. The FAV,
AUTO VOL, XM (if equipped), and
HDD (if available) tabs display.
The display will time out after
approximately ten seconds.
Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV)
Configuring the Number of
Favorite Pages
Noise Compensation Technology
A radio with SCV automatically
adjusts the sound to compensate for
road and wind noise as the vehicle
speeds up or slows down, so that
the volume is consistent while
driving. To activate SCV:
If the vehicle has the radio with DVD
Audio, HDD, and USB, it has Bose
AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology.
The number of favorite pages can
be set up using the CONFIG button.
To setup the number of favorite
pages:
When turned on, AudioPilot
continuously adjusts the audio
system equalization, to compensate
for background noise.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
1. Set the radio volume to the
desired level.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV tab.
2. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
To activate AudioPilot:
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing
the softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.
3. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOL tab on the radio
display.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey under the
AUTO VOL tab on the radio
display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-7
3. Press the softkey below the On
or Off tab located under the
AUTO VOL display to turn this
feature on or off. The display
times out after approximately
10 seconds.
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
Other Information
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB utilizes Gracenote®
technology to provide Song, Artist,
Album, and Genre information
for many CD audio discs and is
capable of playing DVD-A and
DTS‐encoded discs (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.).
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or
more of the following U.S.
Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773;
#6,161,132; #6,230,192;
#6,230,207; #6,240,459;
#6,330,593, and other patents
issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
This feature is most effective at
lower radio volume settings where
background noise can affect how
the music being played through the
vehicle's audio system is heard. At
higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the
background noise, there may
be little or no adjustments by
AudioPilot. For additional
Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
Gracenote® Database
information on AudioPilot, visit
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo
are trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service, Music recognition
technology, and related data are
provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote
is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and
related content delivery.
Radio Message
Locked: Displays when the
TheftLock® system has locked up
the infotainment system. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
If you require more information
regarding the use of the Gracenote
Service, visit: www.gracenote.com/
corporate.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-8
Infotainment System
For the data provided by
Software, and Gracenote
Under no circumstances will
Gracenote® Music Recognition
Service, the content is not
necessarily guaranteed 100%.
Servers for your own personal
non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer,
or transmit the Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data to any third
party.
Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against
you directly in its own name.
Regarding the use of Gracenote
Music Recognition Service. When
this product is used, it is necessary
to agree to the following articles.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN. You agree that your
non-exclusive license to use the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers
will terminate if you violate
these restrictions. If your license
terminates, you agree to cease any
and all use of the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
The Gracenote service uses a
unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes.
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to
allow the Gracenote service to
count queries without knowing
anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote service.
The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables
this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded
databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other
functions.
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes
no representations or warranties,
express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data
from in the Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership
rights.
You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End-User
functions of this application or
device. You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-9
Gracenote reserves the right to
delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data
categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems sufficient.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS
ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT
WARRANT THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED
BY YOUR USE OF THE
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software
or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
FM/AM: Press to choose between
FM and AM.
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
Gracenote is not obligated to
provide you with new enhanced or
additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the
future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE
MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through
the station list. Press the MENU/
SELECT knob to select the desired
station.
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.
¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go to
the previous or to the next radio
station and stay there.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-10
Infotainment System
The radio only tunes into stations
with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
Station List
Selecting a Station
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
display the station list. To create a
list of available stations, select
“Refresh AM Station List” or
“Refresh FM Station List”,
depending on which band is
being used.
Seek Tuning
If the radio station is not known:
FAV: Press to change the
favorites page.
Briefly press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
The radio will search for the next
receivable station. If the radio
does not find a station, it switches
automatically to a more sensitive
search level. If it still does not find a
station, the frequency that was last
active begins to play and “None
Found” displays.
Softkeys: Press to select preset
stations.
Radio Data System (RDS)
In FM, RDS information may be
utilized to categorize the stations by
genre.
The audio system has a Radio
Data System (RDS) feature. RDS
is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS
In both AM and FM, the stations are
arranged in frequency order.
information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from
these stations and only works when
the information is available. While
the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS
station, the station name or call
letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
If the radio station is known:
Storing a Radio Station as a
Favorite
Press and hold ¨ SEEK or © SEEK
until the desired station on the
pop‐up frequency display is almost
reached, then release the button.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while the
vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
Manual Tuning
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the pop‐up display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-11
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs on the display and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV
button). Press the FAV button to go
through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
Time-shifting — Pause and
Rewind Live FM and AM
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the CONFIG button.
To set up the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB has the ability to rewind
60 minutes of FM and AM content.
While listening to the radio, the
content from the current station is
always being buffered to the HDD.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV label.
Press r / j (play/pause) to pause
the radio. The radio display will
show the Time Shift buffer status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content stored in the
buffer and the current pause point.
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing
the softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.
To store a station as a favorite,
perform the following steps:
To resume playback from
the current pause point,
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station is to
be stored.
press r / j again. The radio
will no longer be playing “live”
radio. Instead, time shifted content
is being played from the buffer.
When the radio is playing time
shifted content from the buffer, a
buffer status bar shows below the
station number on the left side of
screen.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds
and “Favorite Saved” displays.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the radio recalls
the station that was set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-12
Infotainment System
Press and hold the REV or FWD
buttons to rewind or fast forward
through the time shift buffer. Hold
FWD until the end of the currently
recorded buffer to resume “live”
radio playback. With “live” radio
playing, the radio display will no
longer show the buffer bar below
the station number.
Pausing FM or AM with the
Vehicle Turned Off
receive the XM service. For
more information, contact
XM at www.xmradio.com or
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
and www.xmradio.ca or
If FM or AM is paused before the
vehicle is turned off, the radio will
continue to buffer the current radio
station for up to one hour. If the
vehicle is turned back on within
one hour, the radio will automatically
resume playback from the pause
point.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
On FM or AM, press the REV or
FWD button multiple times to rewind
or fast forward. Each press will
rewind or fast forward 30 seconds of
content.
m (XM): Press to choose the XM
band (if equipped).
Satellite Radio
TUNE: Turn to search for stations.
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
MENU/SELECT: Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to scroll
through the category list. Press the
MENU/SELECT knob to select the
desired category.
When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared and
automatically restarted for the
current station. You cannot rewind
to content from a previously tuned
station.
XM Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast-to-coast, and in
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song. When information
is not available, No Information
displays.
Time shifting of FM or AM is not
available while recording or while
other sources of playback are
selected.
digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM
service. A service fee is required to
¨ SEEK or © SEEK: Press to go to
the next or to the previous radio
station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-13
FAV: Press to change the
favorites page.
Selecting a Station by Category
Selecting an XM Station
Seek Tuning
The infotainment system can list XM
stations by genre.
Softkeys: Press to select preset
stations.
Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK to go to
the next or previous station.
To select a station from the
category list:
XM Categories
Selecting a Station by Station List
1. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
and highlight the desired genre,
then press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select the genre.
XM stations are organized in
categories.
The infotainment system can list all
XM stations.
Removing or Adding Categories
(Radio with CD and Radio with
Six-Disc CD Only)
To select a station from the
station list:
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob
and highlight the desired station,
then press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select the station.
1. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob and
highlight the desired station.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Press the softkey below the
XM tab.
2. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the station.
Storing an XM Station as a
Favorite
3. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or
the MENU/SELECT knob to
scroll through the available
categories.
The highlighted station will also
automatically be selected if the
TUNE/TONE is released and no
longer turned.
Drivers are encouraged to set up
their radio station favorites while the
vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls,
if the vehicle has this feature.
4. Press any softkey below the
Remove or Add tab to add or
remove the displayed category.
5. Press any softkey below the
Restore All tab to restore all
removed categories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-14
Infotainment System
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys
below the radio station frequency
tabs on the display and by using the
radio favorites page button (FAV
button). Press the FAV button to go
through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the CONFIG button.
To set up the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Time-shifting — Pause and
Rewind Live XM
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB has the ability to rewind
60 minutes of XM content. While
listening to the radio, the content
from the current station is always
being buffered to the HDD.
1. Press the CONFIG button to
display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below
the FAV label.
3. Select the desired number of
favorites pages by pressing
the softkey located below the
displayed page numbers.
Press r / j (play/pause) To pause
the radio. The radio display will
show the Time Shift buffer status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content that is stored in
the buffer and the current pause
point.
combination of AM, FM, or XM
stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen
showing the radio station
frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming
favorites for the chosen number
of pages.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display
the page where the station is to
be stored.
To resume playback from
the current pause point,
press r / j again. The radio will no
longer be playing “live” radio.
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
When that softkey is pressed
and released, the radio recalls
the station that was set.
Instead, time shifted content is
being played from the buffer. When
the radio is playing time shifted
content from the buffer, a buffer
status bar shows below the station
number on the left side of screen.
4. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored as a favorite.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-15
Press and hold the REV or FWD
buttons to rewind or fast forward
through the time shift buffer. Hold
FWD until the end of the currently
recorded buffer to resume “live”
radio playback. With “live” radio
playing, the radio display will no
longer show the buffer bar below
the station number.
Pausing XM with the Vehicle
Turned Off
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
If XM is paused before the vehicle is
turned off, the radio will continue to
buffer the current radio station for
up to one hour. If the vehicle is
turned back on within one hour, the
radio will automatically resume
playback from the pause point.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is
blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Press the REV or FWD button
multiple time to jump to the previous
or next song or commercial.
XM Messages
Channel Unavail: This previously
assigned channel is no longer
assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a
customer's request, by calling
1-800-929-2100.
When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for the
current station. You cannot rewind
to content from a previously tuned
station.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated,
and no action is required. This
process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Artist Info: No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel. The system
is working properly.
Time shifting of XM is not available
while recording or while other
sources of playback are selected.
No Title Info: No song title
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is
functioning correctly, but the vehicle
is in a location that is blocking the
XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-16
Infotainment System
No CAT Info: No category
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is
working properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this
message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to
65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
No Information: No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
CAT Not Found: There are no
channels available for the selected
category. The system is working
properly.
AM
Radio Reception
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
Radio 8‐digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-17
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not clear the inside
rear window with sharp objects.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Backglass Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may
cause loss of the XM signal for a
period of time.
The AM-FM antenna is integrated
with the rear window defogger,
located in the rear window. Make
sure that the inside surface of the
rear window is not scratched and
that the lines on the glass are not
damaged. If the inside surface is
damaged, it could interfere with
radio reception. For proper radio
reception, the antenna connector
needs to be properly attached to the
post on the glass.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket
glass tinting with metallic film.
The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or
distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your backglass antenna due to
metallic tinting materials will
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Cellular Phone Usage
If a cellular telephone antenna
needs to be attached to the glass,
make sure that the grid lines for the
AM-FM antenna are not damaged.
There is enough space between
the grid lines to attach a cellular
telephone antenna without
Multi-Band Antenna
Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on.
This interference can cause an
increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is
received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn
it off.
The antenna located on the roof of
the vehicle is used for the OnStar,
XM Satellite Radio Service System,
and GPS (Global Positioning
System), if the vehicle has these
features. Keep the antenna clear
of obstructions for clear reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof and it is
open, the performance of OnStar,
XM, and GPS can be affected.
interfering with radio reception.
Notice: Using a razor blade or
sharp object to clear the inside
rear window can damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear
window defogger. Repairs would
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-18
Infotainment System
the surface. Pick up discs by
grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at
a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of
foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
Audio Players
CD Player
The infotainment system's CD
player can play audio CDs and
MP3 CDs.
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
CDs that are 8 cm (3 in) in diameter
will not work in the CD player.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the CD
player are:
Care of CDs
Care of the CD Player
CD: Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The disc
and/or track number display when a
CD is in the player.
If playing a CD, the sound quality
can be reduced due to disc quality,
the method of recording, the
Do not add a label to a disc; it could
get caught in the CD player. If a
label is needed, label the top of the
recorded disc with a marking pen.
quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the disc
has been handled. Handle discs
carefully. Store CDs in their original
cases or other protective cases and
away from direct sunlight and dust.
The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of
a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the disc may
not play properly or not at all. Do
not touch the bottom side of a disc
while handling it; this could damage
¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to select
The use of disc lens cleaners for
discs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the
CD player mechanism.
tracks.
TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
to select tracks.
MENU/SELECT: Turn and then
press to select.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pause
and restart CD playback.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-19
To insert multiple CDs:
Inserting a CD (Six-Disc CD
Player)
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track.
1. Press and hold the ^ button
for five seconds. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays.
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into
the CD player. This CD player holds
up to six CDs.
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into
the Six-Disc CD player.
2. Follow the displayed instruction
on when to insert the discs. The
CD player takes up to six CDs.
To insert one CD:
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press
and hold for two seconds to eject all
discs.
1. Press and release the load
button.
3. Press the ^ button again to
cancel loading more CDs.
2. Wait for the message to insert
the disc.
Inserting a CD (Single Disc
Player)
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a CD is in the player, it stays
in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD
partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
A Shuffle tab and the DISC icon
display.
With the printed side facing up,
insert a CD into the audio CD slot
until it is drawn in. The CD track
number and a Shuffle tab display
and playback begins.
When a CD is inserted, the disc
number displays on the upper right
side of the screen and the track
number displays at the left and
center of the screen. The Shuffle
and Disc labels appear below.
4. Press the softkey located below
the Shuffle tab to play the tracks
of a current disc in random
order. Press the softkey again
to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off
displays.
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a CD is in the player, it stays
in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
5. The CD resumes normal
playback.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-20
Infotainment System
Press the softkeys located under
the Disc tab to change to another
disc. The CD begins playback of the
first track on the selected disc. As
each new track starts to play, the
track number displays in the left and
center of the screen.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob or the
MENU/SELECT knob:
For vehicles with a Radio with
Six-Disc CD player, the shuffle
feature only works on the disc that
is currently playing.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob or the
MENU/SELECT knob to highlight
the desired track, then press the
TUNE/TONE knob or MENU/
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
CD players with the MP3 feature are
capable of playing an MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW disc. See MP3 on
page 7‑25 for more information.
SELECT knob to select the track.
Playing a CD
Fast Forward and Rewind
Selecting a CD Track
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed
time of the track displays. Release
to resume playing the track.
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
Disc Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message
displays and/or the disc ejects, it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
To use the seek buttons:
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
.
The radio system does not
support the playlist format, the
compressed audio format, or the
data file format.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK
is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving
backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
.
The road is very rough. When
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to play the tracks of a CD in
random order. Press again to turn
Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-21
.
.
.
.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
direct sunlight and dust. The
CD/DVD Player
The infotainment system's CD/DVD
player can play audio discs and
MP3 discs.
CD/DVD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of
a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the disc may
not play properly or not at all. Do
not touch the bottom side of a disc
while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up discs by
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
There was a problem while
burning the disc.
Discs that are 8 cm (3 in) in
diameter will not work in the
CD/DVD player.
The label is caught in the
CD/DVD-A player.
The CD/DVD player does not
support the playback of DVD video
discs. If a DVD video disc is
inserted into the player, the radio
displays “Read Error Please Check
Disc” and ejects the disc.
grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the disc is not playing correctly,
for any other reason, try a known
good disc.
If the surface of a disc is soiled,
take a soft, lint‐free cloth or dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
Care of CDs and DVDs
If playing a CD/DVD, the sound
quality can be reduced due to disc
quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the disc
has been handled. Handle discs
carefully. Store CDs and DVDs
in their original cases or other
protective cases and away from
Care of the CD/DVD Player
Do not add a label to a disc; it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
player. If a label is needed, label
the top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-22
Infotainment System
The use of disc lens cleaners for
discs is not advised, due to the risk
of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the
CD/DVD player mechanism.
reduced volume. When released,
normal playback resumes and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
¨ SEEK/© SEEK: Press to select
tracks.
TUNE/TONE: Turn and then press
to select tracks.
In DVD‐Audio playback mode,
press once to change playback to a
speed of 2X. Each successive press
changes playback to a speed of 4X,
MENU/SELECT: Turn and then
press to select.
Notice: If a label is added to a
disc, or more than one disc is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged discs,
the CD/DVD player could be
damaged. While using the CD/
DVD player, use only discs in
good condition without any label,
load one dosc at a time, and
keep the CD/DVD player and the
loading slot free of foreign
r /j (Play/Pause): Press to pause
10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume
normal playback.
and restart CD or DVD playback.
s REV (Fast Reverse): In CD or
MP3 playback mode, press and
hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. When released,
normal playback resumes and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
Inserting a Disc
With the printed side facing up,
insert a disc into the audio CD/DVD
slot until it is drawn in. The disc
track number and a Shuffle tab
display and playback begins.
In DVD‐Audio playback mode,
materials, liquids, and debris.
press once to change playback to a
speed of 2X. Each successive press
changes playback to a speed of 4X,
If the ignition or radio is turned off
while a disc is in the player, it stays
in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the disc starts
playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
CD/DVD player are:
10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume
normal playback.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
switch between CD/DVD, auxiliary
input, and USB devices.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): In CD or
MP3 playback mode, press and
hold to advance playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-23
To use the MENU/SELECT knob:
Playing a CD
Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the desired track, then
press the MENU/SELECT knob to
select the track.
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB is capable of playing DVD
audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
surround sound system.
Selecting a CD Track
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, TUNE/TONE knob,
or the MENU/SELECT knob.
Insert the DVD audio disc into
the CD/DVD player. DVD Audio
displays and playback begins. The
Group and track number display
during playback.
Fast Forward and Rewind
To use the seek buttons:
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed
time of the track displays. Release
to resume playing the track.
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
Selecting a DVD‐A Track
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK
is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving
backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
Tracks can be selected using
the seek buttons, or the TUNE/
TONE knob.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
To use the seek buttons:
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
highlight the desired track, then
press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the track.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go
to the next track. If the © SEEK
or ¨ SEEK button is held, or
pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or
forward through the tracks within
the current group.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to play the tracks of a CD in
random order. Press again to turn
Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-24
Infotainment System
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.
Press the softkey under
Press r / j to resume normal
the c tab again while in DVD
PreStop. “DVD Stop” displays.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
display a list of all tracks in all
groups on the DVD audio disc and
to highlight tracks. Stop turning the
TUNE/TONE knob or press the
TUNE/TONE knob to start playback
of the highlighted track.
playback.
Press the r / j button while in
DVDStop to begin playback
from the beginning of the DVD
audio disc.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to
advance playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change
playback to a speed of 2X. Each
successive press changes playback
to a speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X.
Press the r / j button during DVD
audio playback to pause or resume
playback.
To use the MENU/SELECT knob:
Press the softkey under the Menu
tab to display a list of all Groups.
To change Groups, turn the
Press r / j to resume normal
playback.
Selecting DVD Audio Streams
MENU/SELECT knob to highlight
the desired Group. Press the
MENU/SELECT knob to select it.
Playback begins from track 1 of the
highlighted Group.
Each DVD audio Group may contain
audio content that is encoded in
one or two formats. For example, a
particular Group may have both a
5.1 surround audio stream and
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to begin random playback of all
songs in the current Group. Press
again to turn off random playback.
a 2.0 stereo audio stream available.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Stopping DVD Audio Playback
Press the softkey located under
the Audio tab to display the current
audio stream playing. “Audio
Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly
displays. Press the softkey located
under the Audio tab again to toggle
between Audio Stream 1 or Audio
Stream 2 (if available).
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to
reverse playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change
playback to a speed of 2X. Each
successive press changes playback
Press the softkey under the c tab
to stop playback of the DVD audio
disc. “DVD PreStop” displays. Press
the r / j button to resume playback
from where it was stopped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-25
.
.
It is very hot. When the
temperature returns to normal,
the disc should play.
Check the DSP settings to
determine if a 5.1 surround sound
audio stream is playing. See
Operation on page 7‑2 for more
information. Press the DSP
tab to see if the 5.1 + Normal
or 5.1 + Rear settings are available
for selection. If these settings are
available, Audio Stream 1 is playing.
MP3
MP3/WMA Format
The road is very rough. When
the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.
The Single CD and the Six-Disc
CD Radio will play MP3/WMA files
that were recorded on a CD−R or
CD−RW disc. The HDD Radio can
also play MP3/WMA files recorded
on DVD+/−R discs or stored on a
USB storage device. Some USB
storage devices may not be
supported.
.
.
.
.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait
about an hour and try again.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
CD/DVD players with the MP3
feature are capable of playing an
MP3/WMA on DVD+/−R, CD−R,
or CD−RW discs. For more
There was a problem while
burning the disc.
The files can be recorded with the
following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a
variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album can display when
files are recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
The label is caught in the
CD/DVD player.
information, see MP3 on page 7‑25.
If the disc is not playing correctly,
for any other reason, try a known
good disc.
Disc Messages
DISC ERROR: If this message
displays and/or the disc ejects, it
could be for one of the following
reasons:
If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it
down and provide it to your dealer
when reporting the problem.
.
The radio system does not
support the playlist format, the
compressed audio format, or the
data file format.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-26
Infotainment System
.
Minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist names. Long
file, folder, or playlist names,
or a combination of a large
number of files, folders,
or playlists can cause the player
to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files,
Creating an MP3/WMA Disc
The HDD Radio can support more
than 255 files on an MP3/WMA disc.
When creating an MP3/WMA disc:
The HDD Radio does not support
playlists on a disc or USB storage
device.
.
Make sure the MP3/WMA files
are recorded on a CD−R or
CD−RW disc.
Root Directory
.
Do not mix standard audio and
MP3/WMA files on one disc.
The root directory of the CD-R or
CD-RW is treated as a folder. If
the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory displays
as F1 DISC. All files contained
directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. Playlists (Px) are always
accessed after root folders or files.
folders, playlists, or sessions.
.
Make sure the CD does not
.
Finalize the audio disc before
burning it. Adding music to an
existing disc can cause the disc
not to function.
have more than a maximum of
50 folders and playlists, and
255 files to read and play.
.
Create a folder structure that
Playlists can be selected by using
the previous and next folder
buttons, the SEEK arrows, or
makes it easy to find songs
while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each
album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
the \ FWD or s REV buttons.
An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded using no file folders
can also be played. If a CD-R or
CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders and
playlists, and 255 files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to
the maximum, but all items over the
maximum are not accessible.
The HDD Radio displays the root
directory of an MP3/WMA disc as
F1 MP3 and the root directory of a
USB storage device as F1 USB.
.
Avoid subfolders. The system
can support up to 8 subfolders
deep. Keep the total number of
folders to a minimum to reduce
the complexity and confusion
during playback.
.
Create playlists that have a .m3u
or .wpl extension; other file
extensions may not work.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-27
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
File System and Naming
If a root directory or a folder exists
somewhere in the file structure
that contains empty folders and
no compressed files in them, the
player advances to the next folder
in the file structure that contains
compressed audio files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW play in the following order:
The song name that is contained in
the ID3 tag displays. If the song
name is not in the ID3 tag, the radio
displays the file name without the
extension.
.
Play begins from the first track
in the first folder and continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each folder. When the last
track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist.
Track names longer than
32 characters are shortened.
Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the file
name are not displayed.
No Folder
When the CD contains only
compressed files, the files are
located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder functions
do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
The radio displays F1 DISC for the
root directory.
‐ Playlists can be changed by
pressing the next and previous
folder button.
The HDD Radio will display file
names with the extension.
.
Play begins from the first track in
Preprogrammed Playlists
the first playlist and continues
sequentially through all tracks
in each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the
first track of the first folder.
Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however
they cannot be edited using the
radio. These playlists are special
folders containing compressed
audio song files. Playlists must have
a file extension of PLS or M3U.
When the CD contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no
folders, all files are located under
the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then go to
the root folder. The radio displays
F1 DISC for the root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the
display does not automatically show
the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as
the default display. The new track
name displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-28
Infotainment System
Playlists can be selected using the
previous and next folder buttons.
Tracks can be changed by pressing
the seek buttons or turning the
tune knob. Songs are played
To use the seek buttons:
Fast Forward and Rewind
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly
within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed
time of the track displays. Release
to resume playing the track.
Press the © SEEK button to go to
the start of the current track, if more
than five seconds have played.
Press the ¨ SEEK button to go to
sequentially; press s REV
or \ FWD to reverse or advance
through the playing song.
the next track. If © SEEK or ¨ SEEK
is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving
backward or forward through the
tracks on the disc.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
Release to resume playing the
track.
The HDD Radio does not support
preprogrammed playlists. To create
a playlist on the HDD radio from
songs recorded to the HDD, see
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on
page 7‑29.
To use the TUNE/TONE knob:
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob to
highlight the desired track, then
press the TUNE/TONE knob to
select the track.
Searching for MP3 Tracks
Playing an MP3/WMA from a
Disc or a USB Storage Device
Tracks can be searched for by using
the menu system.
To use the softkeys below the
folder tabs:
Selecting an MP3 Track
To use the menu system:
Tracks can be selected using the
seek buttons, the TUNE/TONE
knob, or the softkeys below the
folder tabs on the infotainment
display.
S Folder (Previous Folder): Press
the softkey under the Folder tab to
go to the first track in the previous
folder.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to display the MP3 Menu.
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight an option from the MP3
Menu. The available options are:
Folder T (Next Folder): Press the
softkey under the Folder tab to go to
the first track in the next folder.
.
Playlists*
.
Tracks
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-29
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Folders
Press the second softkey
located under the display to go
to the middle section of the list.
The last radio station that was on
begins playing and a status bar
appears on the top of the display
when the recording process starts.
The status bar disappears when the
process has ended. The recorded
songs are now available.
Artists
Albums
Press the third softkey located
under the display to go to the
last section of the list.
Song Titles
AudioBook
Playing Tracks in Random Order
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the desired option.
Copy Protected CD(s)
Press the softkey under the Shuffle
tab to play the tracks of the current
folder in random order. Press again
to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off
displays.
Make sure the disc is not
copy-protected. The radio does
not copy a copy-protected CD to
the HDD.
*The HDD Radio does not support
preprogrammed playlists. To create
a playlist on the HDD radio from
songs recorded to the HDD, see
Hard Drive Device (HDD) on
page 7‑29.
Deleting a Recorded Song or
Category
Hard Drive Device (HDD)
To use the HDD, tracks must be
recorded from a CD, MP3 Disc,
or USB device first.
Quick Jump
DEL (Delete): Press the DEL
button to delete the track that is
currently playing or select a track
from one of the song lists.
To scroll up or down the list of
Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
press and hold the softkey located
under the FWD or REV tab.
Recording from Audio Discs
To delete an entire category, select
a category and press DEL.
REC (Record): Press to start
recording tracks from the disc while
it is playing. The radio has the
option to record the current track
playing or all tracks from the CD.
Press the softkey under the desired
record option.
To jump to the beginning, middle,
or last section of the list:
.
Press the first softkey located
under the display to go to the
beginning section of the list.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-30
Infotainment System
Stopping the Recording
Audio CD Song, Artist, Album,
and Genre Information
Songs recorded with “NO INFO”
to the HDD will be hard to sort,
identify, and select. To make HDD
navigation easier, CDs with “NO
INFO” can first be converted to MP3
format with Tag information on a
home computer and then recorded
to the HDD from an MP3 disc or
USB device.
While recording from the audio CD,
press the REC button to display the
stop recording option. Press the
softkey under this option to confirm
the selection.
Radios with HDD contain a
Gracenote® Database that the radio
uses to determine the song, artist,
album, and genre information. The
Gracenote Database allows the
radio to record an audio CD to the
HDD and store the content using
song, artist, album, and genre
information.
Ejecting a CD or Turning Off the
Vehicle While Recording
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle
is turned off before the recording
process has completed, tracks that
have been completely recorded
are stored to the HDD. Incomplete
tracks are discarded.
Occasionally, the radio may find
more than one match in the
Gracenote Database for an audio
CD that has been recorded. If this
happens, the radio will display
“Multi‐Hit” for the name information
when the songs are selected from
the HDD. With a “Muli‐Hit” song
playing, press the button below the
EDIT tab to bring up the list of
multiple names found in the
Gracenote Database. Use the
MENU/SELECT knob to highlight
and select the correct name for the
“Multi‐Hit” recorded CD.
Newly released audio CDs as well
as some less common audio CDs
may not be found in the Gracenote
Database stored on the HDD.
If these audio CDs contain CD-text,
the radio will use the CD-text
information when recording the
content to the HDD. If an audio
CD is not found in the Gracenote
Database and it does not have
CD-text information, the radio will
record the audio CD with all song,
artist, album and genre names as
“NO INFO.”
Re-recording Audio CDs
If a CD has already been recorded,
the radio system will not record
the contents again. If a partially
recorded CD is selected for
recording, only those songs which
are not already on the HDD will be
recorded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-31
The Gracenote Database stored on
the HDD can be updated so that it
includes name information for more
recently released audio CDs. See
your dealer for more information on
Gracenote® Database updates for
the HDD radio.
The last radio station that was on
begins playing and a status bar
appears on the top of the display
when the recording process starts.
The status bar disappears when the
process has ended. The recorded
songs are now available.
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
USB Supported Devices
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are
not fully supported. These file types
may or may not play and may be
shown without Tag information.
Without Tag information available,
these file types may be identified
only by file name.
Recording from MP3/WMA
Discs or USB
Playing from the Hard Drive
Device
REC (Record): Press to start
recording tracks from a MP3/WMA
disc or a USB device (excluding
iPods) while it is playing. The radio
has the option to record the current
track playing or all tracks from the
CD. Press the softkey under the
desired record option.
HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press
the HDD button to start playing
tracks from the HDD. HDD displays
and playback resumes from where it
was last stopped.
AudioBooks from www.audible.com
can also be transferred to the HDD
using the record function. See
“AudioBooks” later in this section for
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-32
Infotainment System
.
.
.
.
.
.
Artists
HDD Playback Mode
Albums
The infotainment system displays the current HDD playback mode. The
following table shows the display mode options and what happens as the
mode is displayed:
Song Titles
Genres
Mode
When Displayed
Recently Saved
AudioBook
Shuffle
System is randomly playing back all HDD content.
System is playing back content by a selected artist in
alphabetical order.
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to select the desired option.
Artist
System is playing back content from a selected album in
track order.
Quick Jump
Album
Genre
To scroll up or down the list of
Artists, Albums, or Song Titles,
press and hold the softkey under
the FWD or REV tab.
System is playing back content in a selected genre in
alphabetical order.
Song
System is playing back all songs in alphabetical order.
To jump to the beginning, middle,
or last section of the list:
Playlist
System is playing back all songs from the selected
playlist in the order they were added.
.
Press the first softkey located
AudioBook
System is playing back AudioBook content.
under the display to go to the
beginning section of the list.
.
Press the second softkey
located under the display to go
to the middle section of the list.
HDD Menu
2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight an option from the HDD
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
to display the HDD Menu.
Menu. The available options are:
.
.
Press the third softkey located
under the display to go to the
last section of the list.
Shuffle Songs
.
Playlist
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-33
Shuffle Songs
HDD Categories
Select the HDD Menu category to
display the available items in each
individual category, then select an
item from one of these submenus to
display a list of songs related to that
menu item. Select a song to begin
playback of that song and to put the
HDD in the playback mode.
Select this option from the HDD
Menu to randomly play back HDD
content.
The HDD category mode can be
used to select a song by a particular
artist, album, or genre for playback.
As an example, the HDD Menu
displays a layout such as:
Playlist
Select this option from the HDD
Menu to display all six favorite
playlists, then select one of the
six playlists to display a list of
songs that have been added to that
favorite playlist. Select a song from
the list to begin playback of that
song and to put the HDD into the
Playlist mode. See “Saving HDD
Favorites” later in this section for
more information.
Artists (5)
Albums (6)
Song Titles (77)
Genres (3)
Recently Saved
Select this option from the HDD
Menu to display the last 50 songs
added since the vehicle was
last turned on. The songs are
categorized into songs recorded
from CDs or USB devices.
The radio system displays the
number of available items in each
individual category as shown on the
sample display. For example, the
sample display shows there is
content on the hard drive from
five individual artists.
AudioBook
The radio is able to play back
AudioBook content downloaded
from www.audible.com. This content
can be transferred into the HDD by
either burning it to a CD or copying
it to a USB storage device and then
recording it to the HDD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-34
Infotainment System
The audible.com® playback requires
activation of the vehicle as a player
for downloaded content. The radio
system activates the audible.com
system when information is found
on either a CD inserted into the
CD/DVD player or a USB storage
device that is connected. The
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
is required in order to activate the
vehicle.
Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the softkey under the
favorites selection. Store favorites according to the following table:
Favorites
Action on Press-and-Hold
Display Mode
Adds currently playing track to the playlist
selected.
Playlist
Saves the artist associated with the currently
playing track in the indicated favorites position.
Artist
Saves the album associated with the currently
Album
playing track in the indicated favorites position.
Saving HDD Favorites
Saves the genre associated with the currently
Genre
Press the FAV button to change
between favorite modes during HDD
playback. The following favorite
modes are supported:
playing track in the indicated favorites position.
Configuring HDD Favorites
Time-shifting — Pause and
Rewind Live FM/AM and XM™
(if equipped)
.
Playlists
Press the CONFIG button to display
the radio configuration options.
Press the softkey under the HDD
tab to display the available favorite
modes. Press the softkey under the
favorite tab to set the available
favorite modes. Available favorite
modes are highlighted.
.
Artists
.
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD,
and USB has the ability to rewind
60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
(if equipped) content. While listening
to the radio, the content from the
current station is always being
buffered to the HDD.
Albums
.
Genres
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-35
On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD
button multiple times to rewind or
fast forward. Each press will rewind
or fast forward 30 seconds of
content. On XM, press the REV or
FWD button multiple times to jump
to the previous or next song or
commercial.
If the vehicle is turned back on
within one hour, the radio will
automatically resume playback from
the pause point.
Press r / j (play/pause) to pause
the radio. The radio display will
show the Time Shift buffer status
bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content that is stored in
the buffer and the current pause
point.
Auxiliary Devices
The 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack and
the USB port (if equipped), located
in the center console bin, allow
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle. This is not an audio output;
do not plug headphones into the
auxiliary input jack.
To resume playback from
the current pause point,
When the radio station is
changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for the
current station. You cannot rewind
the content from a previously tuned
station.
press r / j again. The radio
will no longer be playing “live” radio.
Instead, time shifted content is
being played from the buffer. When
the radio is playing time shifted
content from the buffer, a buffer
status bar shows below the station
number on the left side of screen.
Set up auxiliary devices while the
vehicle is stopped. See Defensive
Driving on page 9‑2 for more
Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not
available while recording or while
other sources of playback are
selected.
information on driver distraction.
Press and hold the REV or FWD
buttons to rewind or fast forward
through the time shift buffer. Hold
FWD until the end of the currently
recorded buffer to resume “live”
radio playback. With “live” radio
playing, the radio display will no
longer show the buffer bar below
the station number.
When a device is first connected
to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack
or the USB port (if equipped) the
infotainment system automatically
switches to that device. If an
auxiliary device has already been
connected, press the AUX or
CD/AUX button.
Pausing AM/FM or XM™
(if equipped) with the Vehicle
Turned Off
If AM/FM or XM is paused before
the vehicle is turned off, the radio
will continue to buffer the current
radio station for up to one hour.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-36
Infotainment System
USB Supported Devices
Connecting an iPod
3.5 mm Jack
.
USB Flash Drives
To connect the iPod, connect one
end of the special iPod connection
cable to the iPod’s dock connector.
Connect the other end to both the
USB port and the auxiliary input jack
located in the center console. The
USB port and the auxiliary input jack
are located in the center console
bin. If the vehicle is on and the USB
connection works, a GM logo may
appear on the iPod. The iPod's
music information will be shown on
the radio’s display and the music
begins playing through the vehicle's
audio system.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPods*
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
jack can only be controlled using
the controls on the device.
.
First, Second, or Third
generation iPod nanos*
.
iPod classics*
*For proper operation, make
sure the iPod has the latest
firmware from Apple®. The iPod
firmware can be updated using the
latest iTunes application. See
www.apple.com/itunes.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Use the portable
device to make additional volume
adjustments.
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary):
Press to play a CD when a portable
audio device is playing. Press again
to start playing audio from the
connected portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Aux Device”
displays.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
The iPod's battery charges while
it is connected to the vehicle
and if the ignition is turned to
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
It can also be left connected to the
vehicle after the vehicle is turned
off. With the vehicle turned off, the
iPod will automatically be powered
off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
Connect the USB storage device to
the USB port located in the center
console. Some USB devices may
not be supported.
Playing an MP3/WMA from a USB
Storage Device
See MP3 on page 7‑25 for more
information.
USB Port
The USB connector uses the USB
standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-37
A standard iPod USB cable, like
the one that came with the iPod,
cannot be used to connect an iPod
to the vehicle. The special iPod
connection cable that came
equipped with the vehicle or that
was made available from your
dealer must be used to command
and control an iPod.
To connect and control the iPod
using the radio controls, use the
special iPod connection cable that
came as standard equipment with
the vehicle as part of the USB
option. The special iPod connection
cable can also be purchased or
made available, from your dealer.
See your dealer for more
Phone
Bluetooth
Vehicles with a Bluetooth® system
can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
phone with a Hands‐Free Profile
to make and receive phone calls.
The system can be used while
the ignition is in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system
can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all
phones support all functions, and
not all phones are guaranteed to
work with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
information.
Use a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
stereo cable to connect an older
iPod model that is not supported,
or if the special iPod connection
cable is missing. Command and
control of the iPod using the
infotainment control buttons and
knobs is not supported when only a
3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable is used.
Use the Menu/Select knob to bring
up the iPod Menu and select Songs,
Artists, Albums, Playlists and Audio
books to play from the iPod.
Disconnecting an iPod
To properly dismount the iPod
USB device before disconnecting
from the vehicle, press the softkey
under the EJECT tab on the
infotainment display screen during
iPod playback.
Commanding and Controlling
an iPod
An iPod™ can be controlled by
using the radio buttons and knobs;
the song information shows on the
infotainment system's display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-38
Infotainment System
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
Voice Recognition
Bluetooth Controls
The Bluetooth system uses voice
recognition to interpret voice
commands to dial phone numbers
and name tags.
Use the buttons located on the
steering wheel to operate the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See
Steering Wheel Controls (Audio) on
page 5‑3 for more information.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth
system, sound comes through
the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and over‐rides the audio
system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to
change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent
missed calls, a minimum volume
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
For additional information say
“Help” while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to
answer incoming calls, to confirm
system information, and to start
speech recognition.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
a minimum. The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
c ª (Phone On Hook): Press
to end a call, reject a call, or to
cancel an operation.
When to Speak: A short tone
sounds after the system responds
indicating when it is waiting for a
voice command. Wait until the tone
and then speak.
For vehicles without a navigation
system, the system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, the system responds with
a tone. After the tone, say “Hands
Free.” The system responds with
“Ready” followed by a tone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-39
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can
be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
Pairing
A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
must be paired to the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system first and then
connected to the vehicle before it
can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
If multiple paired cell phones
are within range of the system,
the system connects to the
first available paired cell phone
in the order that they were first
paired to the system. To link to
a different paired phone, see
“Connecting to a Different
5. Locate the device named “Your
Vehicle” in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN that was provided in Step 3.
After the PIN is successfully
entered, the system prompts you
to provide a name for the paired
cell phone. This name will be
used to indicate which phones
are paired and connected to the
vehicle. See “Listing All Paired
and Connected Phones” in this
section for more information.
Phone” later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing Information:
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
.
Up to five cell phones can be
paired to the Bluetooth system.
.
The pairing process is disabled
when the vehicle is moving.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
.
Pairing only needs to be
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
with instructions and a four‐digit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN will be used in
Step 5.
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-40
Infotainment System
Listing All Paired and Connected
Phones
Connecting to a Different Phone
3. Say “Change phone.”
.
To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending on
which cell phone you want to
If another phone is found,
the response will be
“<Phone name> is now
connected.”
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
.
If another phone is not
found, the original phone
remains connected.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “List.”
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles with a
navigation system say “Hands
Free” after the tone.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags in
the Hands Free Directory that is
shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-41
The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
Command
Usage
Store
This command will store a phone number,
or a group of numbers as a name tag.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
Digit Store
This command allows a phone number to
be stored as a name tag by entering the
digits one at a time.
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Delete
This command is used to delete individual
name tags.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to store. After
Delete All Name Tags
This command deletes all stored name tags
in the Hands Free Calling Directory and the
OnStar Turn by Turn Destinations Directory.
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered, say
“Store,” and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
Using the “Store” Command
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
Using the “Delete” Command
Using the “Digit Store” Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
2. Say “Store.”
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
2. Say “Delete.”
3. Say the name tag you want to
delete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-42
Infotainment System
Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Command
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands.
This command deletes all stored
name tags in the Hands Free
Command
Usage
Calling Directory and the OnStar
Turn by Turn Destinations Directory.
Dial or Call
Digit Dial
Re‐dial
The dial or call command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone number or
a stored name tag.
To delete all name tags:
This command allows a phone number to
be dialed by entering the digits one at
a time.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
This command is used to dial the last
number used on the cell phone.
2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
Listing Stored Numbers
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
Command
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
Using the “List” Command
Using the “Digit Dial” Command
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
The digit dial command allows a
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
2. Say “Directory.”
3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”
4. Say “List.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
7-43
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command
Call waiting must be supported on
the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
To hear all of the numbers
recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
.
Press b g to answer an
incoming call when another
call is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
1. Press and hold b g for
two seconds. For vehicles
with a navigation system say
“Hands Free” after the tone.
.
Press b g again to return to the
original call.
Receiving a Call
.
To ignore the incoming call,
2. Say “Digit Dial.”
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
continue with the original call
with no action.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the
last digit has been entered,
say “Dial.”
.
Press c ª to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call
on hold.
.
Press b g to answer the call.
.
Press c ª to ignore a call.
Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-44
Infotainment System
To Transfer Audio from the
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
Three‐Way Calling
Muting a Call
Three‐Way Calling must be
supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
1. Press b g.
2. Say “Transfer Call.”
To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System from a Cell Phone
1. While on a call press b g.
2. Say “Three‐way call.”
To mute a call, press b g and then
say “Mute Call.”
During a call with the audio on
To cancel mute, press b g and
then say “Un‐mute Call.”
3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to call.
the cell phone, press b g for
two seconds. For vehicles with a
navigation system say “Hands Free”
after the tone. The audio transfers
to the vehicle. If the audio does not
transfer to the vehicle, use the audio
transfer feature on the cell phone.
See your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide for more information.
Transferring a Call
4. Once the call is connected,
Audio can be transferred between
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
the cell phone.
press b g to link all the callers
together.
Ending a Call
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
Press c ª to end a call.
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment System
7-45
Voice Pass‐Thru
Dual Tone Multi‐Frequency
(DTMF) Tones
Other Information
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to
the voice recognition commands on
the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
This feature can be used to verbally
access contacts stored in the cell
phone.
The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored
as name tags during a call. You
can use this feature when calling
a menu‐driven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards.
1. Press and hold b g for
1. Press b g.
2. Say “Dial.”
two seconds.
2. Say “Bluetooth.”
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
3. Say “Voice.” The system
responds with “OK, accessing
<phone name>.”
Clearing the System
.
Unless information is deleted out of
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in
the phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous sections on “Deleting a
Paired Phone” and “Storing and
Deleting Phone Numbers.”
The cell phone's normal
prompt messages will
go through their cycle
according to the phone's
operating instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-46
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-1
Climate Control Systems
Climate Controls
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. Display
B. Fan
F. Defrost
G. Air Delivery Mode
C. Power
D. AUTO
H. Temperature and Heated/
Ventilated Seat
I. Air Conditioning
J. Recirculation
E. PASS (Passenger Climate
Control)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Climate Controls
K. Outside Air
To avoid blowing cold air in
cold weather, the system delays
turning on the fan until warm air
is available. The system starts
out blowing air at the floor,
but can automatically change
modes as the vehicle warms
up to maintain the chosen
temperature setting. The length
of time needed for warm up
depends on the outside
Q / R (Temperature Control):
The temperature can be adjusted
separately for the driver and the
passenger. Press to increase or
decrease the automatic temperature
settings.
L. Rear Window Defogger
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls fan speed, air
delivery, and air conditioning in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature. When the
indicator light is on, the system is in
full automatic operation. If the air
delivery mode or fan setting is
manually adjusted, the auto
PASS (Passenger Climate
Control): Press to set a different
temperature for the passenger.
Then adjust the passenger
temperature buttons to a
temperature and the length
of time that has elapsed since
the vehicle was last driven.
comfortable setting.
Pressing the PASS button again
automatically sets the passenger's
temperature to the driver's setting.
indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
3. Wait for the system to regulate.
This may take from 10 to
1. Press the AUTO button.
30 minutes. Then adjust the
temperature, if necessary.
Turning the passenger's
temperature display off does
not shut the passenger's climate
control system off.
2. Adjust the temperature to a
comfortable setting between
21°C (70°F) and 27°C (80°F).
English can be changed to
metric units through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27.
Choosing the coldest or warmest
temperature setting will not
cause the system to heat or
cool any faster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-3
Manual Operation
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
Press the buttons to change the
direction of the airflow. The current
mode appears in the display screen.
Changing the mode cancels the
automatic air delivery. Press AUTO
to return to automatic operation.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor,
and side window outlets. When
this mode is selected, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. If recirculation is
selected while in defog mode, it is
cancelled after 10 minutes.
O (Power): Press to turn the
climate control system on or off.
When the climate control system is
turned off the air inlet defaults to
outside air.
D C (Fan Control): Press the
buttons to increase or decrease the
fan speed. Pressing either button
cancels automatic fan control.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation. The blower may reduce
during an Onstar® session to limit
background noise.
The outboard air outlets always
receive some airflow in every mode,
except defrost.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
0 (Defrost): This mode clears
the windshield of fog or frost
more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield, with some air directed
to the side windows. In this mode,
the system automatically turns
off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor, unless
the outside temperature is at or
below freezing.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
If the airflow seems low when the
fan speed is at the highest setting,
the passenger compartment air
filter might need to be replaced. For
more information, see Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on page 8‑7
and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets. In
automatic operation, cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
This mode can also cause the fan
speed and air temperature to
increase.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield and outboard
outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Climate Controls
Using recirculation for long periods
of time could cause the air inside
the vehicle to become too dry
or stuffy. To prevent this from
happening, after the air in the
vehicle has cooled, select outside
air or press the auto button.
The rear window defogger stays on
for about 15 minutes, before turning
off if the vehicle is moving at a
slower speed. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously. With each additional
press, the defogger runs for about
10 minutes. The defogger can also
be turned off by turning off the
engine.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to
turn the air conditioning system on
or off and override the automatic
system. When in AUTO, the air
conditioning compressor comes on
automatically, as needed.
The air conditioning system
removes moisture from the air, so
water might drip under the vehicle
while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal.
F (Outside Air): Press to turn
on the outside air. An indicator light
turns on. The outside air mode pulls
fresh air from outside the vehicle.
Outside air is always selected in
defrost mode to prevent fogging.
The heated outside rearview mirrors
turn on when the rear window
defogger button is on and helps to
clear fog or frost from the surface of
the mirrors. See Heated Mirrors on
page 2‑29.
M (Recirculation): Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated inside
the vehicle. It helps to quickly cool
the air inside the vehicle or prevent
outside air and odors from entering.
Press the AUTO button to have the
system select the best air delivery
mode for the temperature setting.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog or frost
from the rear window. It only works
when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
Recirculation is not available in the
defrost mode and automatically
turns off 10 minutes after defog is
selected. This helps to limit window
fogging in the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-5
Sensors
z / { (Heated and Ventilated
Seats): Press to heat or ventilate
the seat. See Heated and Ventilated
Front Seats on page 3‑12.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with
remote vehicle start, the climate
control system automatically heats
and cools the vehicle based on the
temperature inside and outside of
the vehicle. The climate control
displays will be blank. See Remote
Vehicle Start on page 2‑12.
The interior temperature sensor,
located on the instrument panel
In cold weather the windshield
defroster and/or rear window
defogger automatically turn on.
If the vehicle has heated seats, they
will also turn on.
to the right of the steering wheel,
measures the temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
The solar sensor located on
the instrument panel, near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
adjust the fan speed and the air
delivery, in order to maintain the
selected temperature. The system
may also supply cooler air to the
side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be
activated, as necessary.
When the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN, the climate control system
returns to the settings used before
the vehicle was last turned off.
The heated seats will turn off,
if equipped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Climate Controls
Do not cover the sensors or the
automatic climate control system will
not work properly.
Under certain conditions, the air
quality sensor will not activate
recirculation, such as during cold
weather or with odors, like skunk. To
Air Vents
Use the air outlets located in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel to direct the
airflow. Use the thumbwheels near
the air outlets to open or close off
the airflow.
Air Quality Sensor
limit odors manually, press M until
the condition has passed.
For vehicles with an air quality
sensor, the climate control system
adjusts to limit some exhaust fumes
from being pulled inside your
vehicle.
The air quality sensor system
does not protect against carbon
monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. See Engine Exhaust
on page 9‑25.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow,
Press the AUTO button on the
climate control to activate the air
quality sensor. The recirculation
indicator light comes on when poor
quality air is detected. The air
quality sensor will not maintain
recirculation for an extended period
to prevent the air inside the vehicle
from becoming too dry or stuffy.
or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
.
Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
.
Use of non‐GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
8-7
To replace the passenger
compartment air filter:
Maintenance
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
2. Turn on the windshield wipers
and turn the ignition off again
when the wipers are straight up
on the windshield.
The passenger compartment air
filter traps most of the dust and
pollen from the air entering the
vehicle. The filter will need to
be changed periodically. See
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9.
This allows access to the
leaf screen. The passenger
compartment air filter is located
under the screen.
The passenger compartment air
filter is located under the hood
below the windshield wiper arm
and the screen on the passenger
side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
Using the climate control system
without the passenger air filter
installed could let water or other
debris enter the system. This could
cause a water leak or noises. Make
sure a new air filter is installed after
removing the old one.
3. Open the hood to access
the engine compartment. See
Hood on page 10‑5 for more
information.
4. Remove the three screws that
hold the screen in place and
lift off the screen by lifting and
sliding it toward the center of the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Climate Controls
5. Pull out on the two tabs located
on each end of the filter cover.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling
it straight up.
7. Remove the old filter and insert
a new one.
See Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 11‑9 for the
correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to
reinstall the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-1
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-22
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Parking (Manual
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Parking Over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Brakes
Driving and
Operating
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Parking Brake (Manual) . . . . . . 9-34
Parking Brake (Electric) . . . . . . 9-35
Brake Assist
Driving Information
(Except CTS-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Competitive Driving Mode . . . 9-39
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . 9-40
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-40
Engine Exhaust
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-26
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-43
Rear Vision
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-31
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Positions (Key
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Ignition Positions (Keyless
Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Driving and Operating
Fuel
Driving Information
WARNING (Continued)
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Gasoline Specifications
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Defensive Driving
(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-48
California Fuel
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑14.
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-49
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Filling a Portable Fuel
Drunk Driving
WARNING
{
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
WARNING
{
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V and
Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Trailer Towing
(CTS-V and Coupe) . . . . . . . . 9-58
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Do not drink and
drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not
drink.
.
Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
(Continued)
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22.
9-3
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system
can make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding to
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is
Police records show that
reaction time.
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Average reaction time is about
three‐fourths of a second. But
that is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long as
two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in three‐fourths of
a second, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
the vehicle. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑38.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Driving and Operating
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
The vehicle has a steering system
that varies the amount of effort
required to steer the vehicle in
relation to the speed of the vehicle.
The amount of steering effort
required is less at slower speeds
to make the vehicle more
maneuverable and easier to park.
At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like
feel to the steering. This provides
maximum control and stability.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates
a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer
brake life.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10‑3.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer
than normal when parking or driving
slowly, there may be a problem with
the system. You will still have power
steering, but steering will be stiffer
than normal at slow speeds. See
your dealer for service.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost
because the engine stops or the
power steering system is not
functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-5
Steering Tips
Steering in Emergencies
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the
one factor that can be controlled.
If there is a need to reduce speed,
do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
The vehicle can perform very
well in emergencies like these.
First apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 9‑3. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-6
Driving and Operating
pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
The three types of skids
correspond to the vehicle's
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
three control systems. In the
braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering
in a curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the
acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to
slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the
edge of the pavement. Turn the
steering wheel 8 to 13 cm
(3 to 5 in), about one-eighth turn,
until the right front tire contacts the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-7
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try to avoid
Be sure to check the oil level
often during competitive driving
and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper
operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how
to add oil, see Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep‐standing or flowing water.
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
WARNING
{
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
CTS‐V Only: For competitive
driving, it is recommended that
the brake fluid be replaced with a
high performance brake fluid that
has a dry boiling point greater than
279°C (534°F). After conversion to
the high performance brake fluid,
follow the brake fluid service
recommendations outlined by the
fluid manufacturer. Do not use
silicone or DOT‐5 brake fluids.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Competitive Driving
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Competitive driving may affect the
vehicle warranty. See the warranty
book before using the vehicle for
competitive driving.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Notice: If you use your vehicle
for competitive driving, the
engine may use more oil than it
would with normal use. Low oil
levels can damage the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Driving and Operating
.
.
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
Hydroplaning
Hill and Mountain Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
Have good tires with proper
tread depth. See Tires on
page 10‑64.
.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in
good shape.
Highway Hypnosis
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep or long hills.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Other driving tips include:
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
WARNING
{
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
.
.
Allow extra following distance.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
.
Pass with caution.
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
.
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-9
.
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
WARNING
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑33 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You
could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in
gear when going downhill.
Winter Driving
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow
or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain
icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped,
on slippery surfaces.
Top of hills: Be
alert — something could
be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Driving and Operating
If possible, use the Roadside
Service (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑9. To get
help and keep everyone in the
vehicle safe:
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
.
Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
.
Check again from time to
time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside
mirror.
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
.
Open a window about 5 cm
WARNING
{
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
.
Fully open the air outlets
on or under the instrument
panel.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.
.
Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for
only short periods as needed to
warm the vehicle and then shut the
engine off and close the window
most of the way to save heat.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-11
Repeat this until help arrives
but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold.
Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑111.
WARNING
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 10‑86.
Vehicle Load Limits
If the Vehicle is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
It is very important to know how
much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
Turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent
transmission wear, wait until the
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory‐installed options.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Driving and Operating
Two labels on the vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Tire and Loading Information
Label
positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 10‑64 and
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72.
WARNING
{
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle. See “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle's center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's
door open, you will find the label
attached near the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
number of occupant seating
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-13
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's
placard.
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
See Trailer Towing (Except
CTS-V) on page 9‑57 or Trailer
Towing (CTS-V) on page 9‑58
for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg
(700 lbs).
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Driving and Operating
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification
label is attached to either the
driver's door edge or the lower
center pillar on the driver's side
of the vehicle. The label tells
the gross weight capacity of
the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-15
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for the vehicle, or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
load, it should be spread out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
.
Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.
.
Secure loose items in the
vehicle.
WARNING
{
Do not leave a seat folded
down unless needed.
.
Put things in the cargo
area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Driving and Operating
.
.
.
Avoid downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle when the
engine speed will exceed
4000 rpm.
Check engine oil with every
refueling and add if necessary.
Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher than normal during the
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles).
Starting and
Operating
.
New Vehicle Break-In
Follow these recommended
guidelines during the
Do not let the engine labor.
Never lug the engine in high
gear at low speeds. With a
manual transmission, shift to
the next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.
To break in new tires, drive
at moderate speeds and
avoid hard cornering for the
first 322 km (200 miles). New
tires do not have maximum
traction and may tend to slip.
first 2 414 km (1,500 miles)
of driving this vehicle. Parts
have a break-in period and
performance will be better in
the long run.
.
.
Do not participate in track
events, sport driving schools,
or similar activities during this
break–in period.
New brake linings also need
a break–in period. Avoid
making hard stops during the
first 322 km (200 miles). This is
recommended every time brake
linings are replaced.
For the first 2 414 km (1,500 miles):
.
Avoid full throttle starts and
abrupt stops.
.
Do not exceed
4,000 engine rpm.
.
Avoid driving at any one
constant speed, fast or slow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-17
key is all the way in. If it is and
you have a manual transmission
vehicle, turn the steering wheel
left and right while you turn the
key hard. If none of this works,
then the vehicle needs service.
In an emergency:
Ignition Positions
(Key Access)
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, or Neutral with a
manual transmission. Turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
page 9‑22 for more information.
This is the only position in which the
key can be removed. This position
locks the ignition and shifter on
automatic transmission vehicles,
and the ignition and steering wheel
on manual transmission vehicles.
The ignition switch can be turned to
four different positions.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
switch must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal must be applied.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key from its cylinder could cause
damage or break the key. Use the
correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Driving and Operating
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
D (START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the
driver door is opened, the ignition is
in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF, and the key is in the ignition.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position lets you use things like the
radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. This position
allows you to turn off the engine.
Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access)
You can turn the ignition control
knob to four different positions.
Using a tool to force the ignition
control knob from its cylinder could
damage it.
C (ON/RUN): This position is for
driving. It is the position the ignition
switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
To shift out of P (Park), the
ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular
brake pedal must be applied.
Make sure the keyless access
transmitter is inside the vehicle
when trying to turn the ignition
control knob.
To shift the transmission out of
P (Park), the ignition key has to be
in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9‑22
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-19
The ignition control knob cannot be
removed from the vehicle. The
keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle to start the
engine. This position locks the
ignition and shifter on automatic
transmission vehicles, and the
ignition and steering wheel on
manual transmission vehicles.
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, or Neutral with a
manual transmission. Turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
The battery could be drained if
you leave the ignition in the ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
with the engine off. You may not be
able to start the vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35
D (START): This position starts the
engine.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position allows you to use things
like the radio and the windshield
wipers when the engine is off. This
position will allow you to turn off the
engine.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the
proper gear.
If the vehicle has the keyless
In an emergency:
access system, the keyless access
transmitter must be authenticated
in order for the ignition control knob
to turn. The transmitter can be
authenticated either by putting
your foot on the brake pedal or by
pushing the ignition control knob in.
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
C (ON/RUN): This position is for
driving. It is the position the ignition
switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the control knob is
released.
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
firmly apply the brakes and steer
the vehicle to a safe location.
If you need to shift the
transmission out of P (Park),
the ignition control knob has to
be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Driving and Operating
Automatic Transmission
If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter needs replacing, the
DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY
IN REMOTE KEY. The vehicle
can still be driven. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation (Key Access) on
page 2‑5 or Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation (Keyless
Access) on page 2‑7 for more
information.
Starting Procedure
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. If the vehicle has the
keyless access system, push
the ignition control knob in and
rotate the knob to the START
position. When the engine starts,
let go of the ignition. The idle
speed will go down as your
engine gets warm. Do not race
the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow
the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, your foot must be
on the brake pedal to start the
engine. To rotate the ignition control
knob, put your foot on the brake
pedal and turn the ignition control
knob to the START position. If the
ignition control knob does not turn,
try pushing the knob in and turning
again. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the ignition
control knob, it will return to the
ON/RUN position.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key
is turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in neutral
position and the parking brake
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
down to the floor and start the
engine. The vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the
way down.
If the transmitter is not in the
vehicle or something is interfering
with the transmitter, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will
display ELECTRONIC KEY NOT
DETECTED. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-21
START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, do the same
thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
cranking motor cool down.
lubricates all moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start
after 5‐10 seconds, especially
in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded
with too much gasoline. Try
Notice: The engine is designed to
work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
When first starting the vehicle,
the engine idle speed will be
elevated to allow the catalytic
converter, an emissions
control device, to quickly reach
operating temperature. After
approximately 20 seconds, the
engine will begin to transition to
its normal, quieter idle speed,
which can vary depending on
the temperature. This is normal
operation.
pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum
of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts,
let go of the key and accelerator.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Driving and Operating
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
Engine Coolant Heater
WARNING
{
Vehicles with the engine coolant
heater can use this option in
cold weather conditions at or
below −18°C (0°F) for easier
starting and better fuel economy
during engine warm-up. Plug in the
coolant heater at least four hours
before starting your vehicle. An
internal thermostat in the plug-end
of the cord may exist which will
prevent engine coolant heater
operation at temperatures
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause
an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured.
Plug the cord into a properly
grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the audio system will
work up to 10 minutes or until the
driver door is opened. Power to
the windows or sunroof will work
up to 10 minutes or until any
door is opened. For an additional
10 minutes of operation, close all
the doors and turn the key to
ON/RUN and then back to
LOCK/OFF.
above −18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant
Heater
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep
it away from moving engine
parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap
the electrical cord. The cord is
located near the driver side strut
tower.
Contact your dealer for information
on how long to use the heater in
your particular area.
Remove the plastic cap to
access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-23
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)
by holding in the button on the
shift lever and pushing the lever
all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
Shifting Into Park
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
{
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. For vehicles with key access,
remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle
with the ignition key in your
If you have to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking brake
set. After shifting into P (Park), try to
move the shift lever out without first
pushing the button on the shift lever.
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
For vehicles with the keyless
access system, take the keyless
access transmitter with you.
Leaving the Vehicle With the
Engine Running (Automatic
Transmission)
If you can, the shift lever was not
fully locked into P (Park).
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35 for more
information.
P (Park) with the parking brake
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Driving and Operating
To shift out of P (Park):
Torque Lock (Automatic
Transmission)
Shifting Out of Park
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever.
This vehicle is equipped with
an electronic shift lock release
system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see "Shifting Into Park"
listed previously.
If unable to shift out of P (Park):
.
Prevent ignition key removal
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released, for vehicles
with key access.
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
.
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park), unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the brake
pedal is applied.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the shift lever will not move from
P (Park), consult your dealer or a
professional towing service.
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
Parking (Manual
Transmission)
Before getting out of the vehicle,
place the shift lever in R (Reverse)
and firmly apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106 for more information.
For vehicles with the key access
ignition, turn the ignition key to
OFF/LOCK, and remove the key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-25
See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 9‑17 or Ignition Positions
(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 for
more information.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
damage or after-market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
WARNING
{
For vehicles with the keyless
access ignition, turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless
access transmitter.
Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If unusual fumes are detected or
if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
If towing a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑53.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
Parking Over Things
That Burn
.
Have the vehicle repaired
immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
WARNING
{
.
The exhaust smells or
sounds strange or different.
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
.
The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
.
The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Driving and Operating
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
Automatic
Transmission
The shift lever is located on the
center console between the front
seats.
WARNING
{
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
WARNING
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
Follow the proper steps to be sure
the vehicle will not move. See
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑23.
There are several different positions
for the shift lever.
P (Park): This position locks the
rear wheels. Use this position when
starting the engine because the
vehicle cannot move easily.
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-27
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. Fully apply the
regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before shifting
from P (Park) when the ignition key
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out
of P (Park), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into another
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on
page 9‑24.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
WARNING
{
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse)
can be used to rock the vehicle
back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission. See If the Vehicle is
Stuck on page 9‑11 for additional
information.
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
page 9‑23. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑53.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Driving and Operating
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart when the vehicle
is already moving, use N (Neutral)
only. You can also use N (Neutral)
when the vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
Downshifting the transmission in
slippery road conditions could result
in skidding; see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 9‑6
While in D (Drive), the CTS‐V
vehicle's first forward gear
automatic shift after starting the
vehicle will be from 1 (First).
Afterwards, the CTS‐V vehicles will
always start in 2 (Second) gear.
While in M (Manual Mode), for
increased performance, the vehicle
will start in 1 (First) gear.
WARNING
{
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
.
Going less than 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
M (Manual Mode): This position
allows the driver to select the range
of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions. See Driver Shift
Control (DSC) later in this section.
.
Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Notice: Spinning the tires
or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may
damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in
place.
The transmission will shift down
to a lower gear and have more
power.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-29
When you are in sport mode
the vehicle will still shift
To use the DSC feature with the Tap
Shift controls (if equipped):
Manual Mode
Driver Shift Control (DSC) or
Tap Shift
automatically. The transmission
may remain in a gear longer
than it would in the normal
driving mode based on braking,
throttle input, and vehicle lateral
acceleration.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
SPORT MODE will be displayed
in the DIC momentarily. The
vehicle will remain in sport
mode if the shift lever is not
moved. Sport mode will shift
automatically, but remain in a
gear longer then it would in
normal driving mode based on
braking and acceleration.
Vehicles with Driver Shift Control
(DSC) allow shifting an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission.
1. Move the shift lever to
the right from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
Use DSC through the shift lever or
the Tap Shift controls on the back of
the steering wheel (if equipped).
2. To go from sport mode to DSC,
move the shift lever forward to
upshift or rearward to downshift.
2. The Tap Shift controls are on the
back of the steering wheel. Tap
the left control to downshift, and
the right control to upshift.
To use the DSC feature using the
shift lever:
1. Move the shift lever to
the right from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
3. To exit DSC and enter sport
mode, hold the shift lever in the
upshift/forward position briefly.
3. To return to sport mode, hold the
upshift/right control briefly.
Once in M (Manual Mode)
position, if you do not move the
shift lever forward or rearward,
the vehicle will be in sport mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Driving and Operating
While using the DSC feature, the
vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for
sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to downshift for more
power or engine braking.
While in the DSC mode, the
CTS automatic transmission will
automatically downshift when the
vehicle comes to a stop. This will
allow for more power during
acceleration.
The CTS-V automatic transmission
will not automatically downshift
on hard acceleration when in
DSC mode.
The transmission will only allow
you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (RPM). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine rpm is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum
engine rpm is reached.
When accelerating the vehicle
from a stop in snowy and icy
conditions, it is suggested to shift
into second gear. A higher gear
allows the vehicle to gain more
traction on slippery surfaces.
The tachometer display indicates
which gear the vehicle is in. The
number indicates the requested
gear range when moving the shift
lever forward or rearward.
If shifting is prevented for any
reason, the currently selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not shifted
gears.
CTS-V vehicles use tracer
lights around the outside of the
tachometer as a performance
upshift light. These tracers flash to
indicate when to shift to the next
higher gear to avoid the engine
speed limit. See Tachometer on
page 5‑13 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-31
CTS—V
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
and let up on the accelerator pedal,
then shift into 2 (Second). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal
while accelerating.
Manual Transmission
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, the shift lever is
located on the center console
between the front seats. The
following explains how to operate
the manual transmission.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),
and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the
same for 2 (Second).
CTS
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle your engine. Your
shift lever is in Neutral when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into 1 (First). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal while pressing
on the accelerator pedal.
Shift into 1 (First) when you are
going less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 64 km/h
(40 mph). After a complete stop, if it
is hard to shift into 1 (First), let up
on the clutch pedal, then press it
back down and shift into 1 (First).
R (Reverse): To back up, press
down the clutch pedal, completely
stop the vehicle, and shift into
R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Driving and Operating
The CTS-V transmission prevents
easily shifting into R (Reverse)
using normal shifting force while
the vehicle is moving at more than
5 km/h (3 mph), or when the ignition
is in LOCK/OFF.
If the vehicle speed drops below
32 km/h (20 mph), or if the engine is
not running smoothly, downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have
to downshift two or more gears to
keep the engine running smoothly
or for good performance.
While you accelerate, it is normal
for the light to go on and off if you
quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when
you downshift.
CTS-V vehicles use tracer
lights around the outside of the
tachometer as a performance
up‐shift light. These tracers flash to
indicate when to shift to the next
higher gear to avoid the engine
speed limit. See Tachometer on
page 5‑13 for more information.
Shift Speeds (Manual
Transmission)
Up-Shift Light
WARNING
{
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
Skip Shift (CTS‐V)
Under light acceleration, the
Vehicles with a manual transmission
have an up‐shift light on the
instrument panel. This light shows
when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
transmission will only allow you to
shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth).
Shifts from 1 (First) to 2 (Second) or
3 (Third) are not allowed. This helps
improve fuel mileage.
Notice: If you skip more than
one gear when you downshift,
or if you race the engine when
you release the clutch pedal while
downshifting, you could damage
the engine, clutch, driveshaft or
the transmission. Do not skip
gears or race the engine when
downshifting.
When this light comes on, you
can shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions
allow. For the best fuel economy,
accelerate slowly and shift when the
light comes on.
Under harder acceleration, Skip
Shift is disabled, and the driver has
all gears available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-33
If driving safely on a wet road
Drive Systems
Brakes
and it becomes necessary to slam
on the brakes and continue braking
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
All-Wheel Drive
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
Vehicles with this feature
always send engine power to all
four wheels. It is fully automatic,
and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
When using a compact spare tire
on an AWD vehicle, the system
automatically detects the compact
spare and disables AWD. To restore
AWD operation and prevent
excessive wear on the system,
replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
See Compact Spare Tire on
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
page 10‑106 for more information.
If there is a problem with ABS, this
warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑23.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Driving and Operating
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to
apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light on the
Parking Brake (Manual)
instrument panel cluster should
come on. If it does not, you need
to have the vehicle serviced. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22 for more information.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower portion of
the instrument panel to the left of
the steering wheel.
Braking in Emergencies
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down, then push the
parking brake pedal down.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
To release the parking brake, pull
the release lever located to the
left of the steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-35
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
Parking Brake (Electric)
WARNING
{
On vehicles with a manual
transmission, releasing the clutch
and pressing the accelerator
will release the Electric Parking
Brake. If the vehicle is not in a
gear, the vehicle could move, and
you or others could be injured.
Make sure the vehicle is in a gear
before attempting to drive away.
To avoid unexpected vehicle
movement, do not partially
A warning chime will sound if the
parking brake is set, the ignition is
on, and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the
parking brake.
Vehicles with the electric parking
brake (EPB) have a switch in the
center console.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑53 for more information.
release the clutch or press the
accelerator pedal until you are
ready to release the parking
brake and drive away.
The EPB takes the place of the
manual parking brake system, the
foot pedal and release handle.
The EPB can always be activated,
even if the ignition is OFF. To avoid
draining the battery, do not operate
the EPB too often without the
engine running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Driving and Operating
The system has two warning lights
and five Driver Information Center
(DIC) messages. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 5‑22 and
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for more information. In
case of insufficient electrical power,
the EPB cannot be applied or
released.
If the EPB is applied while the
vehicle is in motion, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
RELEASE PARK BRAKE SWITCH
will be displayed. The vehicle
will decelerate as long as the
switch is held in the up position.
Releasing the EPB switch during
the deceleration will release the
parking brake. If the switch is held
in the up position until the vehicle
comes to a stop, the EPB will
remain applied.
If the yellow light is on, the EPB has
detected an error in another system
and is operating with reduced
functionality. To apply the EPB when
this light is on, lift up on the EPB
switch and hold it in the up position.
Full application of the parking brake
by the EPB system may take a
longer period of time than normal
when this light is on. Continue to
hold the switch until the BRAKE
light remains on. If the yellow light is
on, see your dealer.
EPB Apply
The EPB can be applied any time
the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is
applied by momentarily lifting up on
the EPB switch. Once fully applied,
the BRAKE light will be on, and the
DIC message PARK BRAKE SET
will be displayed. While the brake is
being applied, the status light will
flash until full apply is reached.
If the light does not come on,
or remains flashing, you need to
have the vehicle serviced. Do not
drive the vehicle if the BRAKE light
is flashing. See your dealer. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑22 for more information.
If the BRAKE light is on, either the
EPB is applied, or there is a failure
in the hydraulic brake system.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear
wheels should be blocked to
prevent vehicle movement.
If this light is flashing continuously,
the EPB is only partially applied
or released, or there is a problem
with the EPB. The DIC message
SERVICE PARK BRAKE will be
displayed. If this light is flashing
continuously, release the EPB, and
attempt to apply it again. If this light
continues to flash, do not drive the
vehicle. See your dealer.
EPB Release
To release the EPB, turn the
ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position, apply and hold the brake
pedal, and push down momentarily
on the EPB switch. If you attempt
to release the EPB without the
brake pedal applied, a chime will
sound, and the DIC message
STEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASE
PARK BRAKE will be displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-37
The EPB is released when the
BRAKE light is off and the
DIC message PARK BRAKE
RELEASED is displayed.
Automatic EPB Release
Brake Assist
(Except CTS-V)
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the
driver in stopping or decreasing
vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the
power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
The EPB will automatically release
if the vehicle is running, placed into
gear, and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration
when the EPB is applied, to
If the yellow light is on, the EPB has
detected an error in another system
and is operating with reduced
functionality. To release the EPB
when this light is on, push down on
the EPB switch and hold it in the
down position. EPB release may
take a longer period of time than
normal when this light is on.
preserve park brake lining life.
The EPB can also be used to
prevent roll back for vehicles with
a manual transmission taking off on
a hill. In a situation where no roll
back is desired, an applied EPB will
allow both feet to be used for the
clutch and accelerator pedals in
preparation for starting the vehicle
moving in the intended direction.
Continue to hold the switch until the
BRAKE light is off. If the yellow light
is on, see your dealer.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the red
brake warning light is off before
driving.
In this situation, perform the normal
clutch and/or accelerator actions
required to begin moving the
vehicle. There is no need to push
the switch to release the EPB.
If you are towing a trailer and
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9‑53 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Driving and Operating
on page 9‑11 for more information.
See Winter Driving on page 9‑9 for
information on using TCS when
driving in snowy or icy conditions.
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel
spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. On a
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
flashes when the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin.
rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system
operates if it senses that one or
both of the rear wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. On an
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the
system will operate if it senses that
any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system brakes the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces
engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on if there is a problem
with the traction control system.
When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
page 5‑24 for more information.
This button is located on the
instrument panel (CTS) or the
steering wheel (CTS-V).
Press and release the TCS/
StabiliTrak button and the traction
control system will turn off and the
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will
come on. Press the button again
to turn the system back on. For
information on turning StabiliTrak
off and on, see StabiliTrak System
following.
TCS automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started.
To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, the system
should always be left on, but it may
be necessary to turn the system off
if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud
or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
affect your vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-39
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle has an electronic
stability control system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
the brake pedal. This is normal.
Continue to steer the vehicle in the
intended direction.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. The
system should be left on to help
assist with directional control of the
vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to be
turned off, press and hold the TCS/
StabiliTrak button until the TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light comes on
and STABILITRAK OFF comes on
the DIC. More steering effort is
required when the system is
If there is a problem detected
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
STABILITRAK displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
comes on the instrument panel
cluster. When this message and
warning light displays, the system is
not operational. Driving should be
adjusted accordingly. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 and Messages and
Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑24 for
more information.
StabiliTrak activates when the
system senses a discrepancy
between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the direction which
you are steering.
turned off.
If cruise control is being used when
the StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow,
reengage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑41 for
more information.
Competitive Driving Mode
To select this optional
handling mode, press the
TCS/StabiliTrak button quickly
two times and STABILITRAK
COMPETITIVE MODE displays in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
When the system activates, this
warning light flashes on the
instrument panel. A noise may be
heard or a vibration may be felt in
This button is located on the
instrument panel (CTS) or the
steering wheel (CTS-V).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Driving and Operating
While in the StabiliTrak Competitive
Mode, the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light comes on, TCS does not limit
wheel spin, and more effort is
required to turn the steering wheel.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Driver Information Center (DIC)
briefly displays SUSPENSION
MODE TOUR or SUSPENSION
MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or
when a new mode is selected.
Magnetic Ride Control
With this feature on the CTS-V, the
Magnetic Ride Control system
adjusts the ride of the vehicle to
Tour or Sport modes. Magnetic Ride
Control monitors the suspension
system to determine the proper
system response.
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button
again, or turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the
vehicle, to turn TCS back on and
turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light off.
TOUR: Use for normal city and
highway driving. This setting
provides a smooth, soft ride.
Press and release this button,
located in the center of the
instrument panel, to change modes.
SPORT: Use where road conditions
or personal preference demand
more control. This setting provides
more “feel,” or response to road
conditions.
Notice: When traction control is
turned off, or Competitive Driving
Mode is active, it is possible
to lose traction. If you attempt
to shift with the drive wheels
spinning with a loss of traction, it
is possible to cause damage to
the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused
by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book
for additional information.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle
can give more traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When
traction is low, this feature allows
the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle. The
limited-slip rear axle also gives the
driver enhanced control when
cornering hard or completing a
maneuver, such as a lane change.
The setting can be changed at any
time. Based on road conditions,
steering wheel angle, and the
vehicle speed, the system
automatically adjusts to provide the
best handling while providing a
smooth ride. The Tour and Sport
modes will feel similar on a smooth
road. Select a new setting whenever
driving conditions change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-41
If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak®
system and begins to limit wheel
spin while you are using cruise
control, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.
When road conditions allow you to
safely use it again, the cruise
control can be turned back on.
I (On/Off): Turns the system on
or off. The indicator light on the
button turns on when cruise control
is on.
Cruise Control
WARNING
{
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate):
Press briefly to make the vehicle
resume to a previously set speed,
or press and hold to accelerate.
−SET (Set/Coast): Press to set the
speed and activate cruise control or
make the vehicle decelerate.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
With cruise control, a speed of
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
be maintained without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
CTS Shown, CTS‐V Similar
The cruise control buttons are
located on the left side of the
steering wheel.
When the brakes are applied, the
cruise control turns off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Driving and Operating
.
To slow down in small amounts,
press the −SET button on the
steering wheel briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
The cruise control light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
after the cruise control has been set
to the desired speed.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Press and hold the +RES button
Passing Another Vehicle While
Using Cruise Control
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
3. Press the −SET button and
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle's speed.
When you take your foot off the
pedal, the vehicle will slow down to
the previous set cruise speed.
release it.
.
To increase vehicle speed in
4. Take your foot off the
accelerator.
small amounts, press the +RES
button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed
Using Cruise Control on Hills
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep
hills, you might have to step on
the accelerator pedal to maintain
the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle's speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control
is disengaged.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
Once the vehicle is driving at about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the
+RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle returns to the previous
set speed and stays there.
.
Press and hold the −SET button
on the steering wheel until the
desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-43
Ending Cruise Control
Object Detection
Systems
WARNING
{
There are four ways to end cruise
control:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
.
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
Step lightly on the brake pedal
(manual and automatic
transmissions).
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system assists the driver
with parking and avoiding objects
while in R (Reverse). URPA
operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
(5 mph), and the sensors on the rear
bumper detect objects up to 2.4 m
(8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
.
.
Objects that are below the
Press the clutch pedal to the
floor (manual transmissions).
bumper, underneath the
vehicle, or too close or far
from the vehicle.
.
.
Press [ on the steering wheel.
.
To turn off the cruise control,
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
press I on the steering wheel.
If you do not use proper care
before and while backing, vehicle
damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always
check behind the vehicle before
backing up. While backing, be
sure to look for objects and check
the vehicle's mirrors.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
the I button or if the ignition is
turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Driving and Operating
.
.
The vehicle's bumper is
damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
How the System Works
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly
URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
to indicate the system is working.
If the URPA system will not activate
due to a temporary condition, the
message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC when the shift
lever is moved into R (Reverse).
This occurs under the following
conditions:
Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
Objects must be at least 25.4 cm
(10 in) off the ground and below
trunk level, and within 2.4 m (8 ft)
from the rear bumper to be
detected. The distance may be
less during warmer or humid
weather.
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC)
The vehicle may have a Rear Vision
Camera system. Read this entire
section before using it.
.
The driver disables the system.
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 10‑113.
A single beep sounds the
first time an object is detected
between 1.0 m (40 in) and 2.4 m
(8 ft) away. Beeping occurs
continuously when the vehicle is
0.3 m (12 in) or closer to an object.
The rear vision camera system is
designed to help the driver when
backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle.
.
A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or a bicycle or an object
was hanging out of the trunk
during the last drive cycle. Once
the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
The system can be disabled through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
See “Parking Assist” under Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 5‑27 for more information.
.
A tow bar is attached to the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-45
The delay can be cancelled
by performing one of the
following:
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
system does not replace driver
vision. RVC does not:
Even though the vehicle has
the RVC system, always check
carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the
vehicle.
.
Shifting in to P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of
8 km/h (5 mph).
.
Detect objects that are
outside the camera's field of
view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
There may be a message on the
rear vision camera screen that
states “Check Surroundings for
Safety.”
Using the System
.
Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
When the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the
navigation screen, or on the inside
rear view mirror. Once the driver
shifts out of R (Reverse), the
navigation screen will go back to the
last screen that had been displayed,
or the video image will automatically
disappear from the mirror after a
delay.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
Do not back the vehicle by only
looking at the RVC screen, or use
the screen during longer, higher
speed backing maneuvers or
where there could be cross-traffic.
Your judged distances using the
screen will differ from actual
distances.
Service Rear Vision Camera
System: This message can display
when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other
vehicle systems.
d (Service Rear Vision Camera
System Icon): This icon can
display when the system is not
receiving information it requires from
other vehicle systems.
If you do not use proper care
before backing up, you could
hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
The delay that is received after
shifting out of R (Reverse) is
approximately 5 seconds.
If any other problem occurs or if a
problem persists, see your dealer.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Driving and Operating
The area displayed by the camera is
limited and does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper. The area
Rear Vision Camera Location
displayed can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the
license plate.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-47
When the System Does Not
Seem To Work Properly
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is
an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
The rear vision camera system
might not work properly or display a
clear image if:
.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of
headlights is shining directly
into the camera lens.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
The eighth digit of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) shows
the code letter or number that
identifies the vehicle's engine.
The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on
page 12‑1.
.
The back of the vehicle is in
an accident, the position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
.
There are extreme temperature
changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Driving and Operating
You might also hear audible spark
knock during acceleration. Refill the
tank with premium fuel as soon as
possible to avoid damaging the
engine. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
91octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Recommended Fuel
California Fuel
Requirements
If the vehicle has a V6 engine,
use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
If the vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
Gasoline Specifications
(U.S. and Canada Only)
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification D 4814 in
the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5
or 3.511 in Canada. Some
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code P), use premium
gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
on page 9‑49 for additional
information.
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium
unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 93. In an
emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 or higher. If 87 octane
fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such
as wide open throttle applications.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-49
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any
other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
tank at every engine oil change,
can help clean deposits from fuel
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS is the only
gasoline additive recommended by
General Motors. It is available at
your dealer.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol,
and reformulated gasolines
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
might be available in your area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Driving and Operating
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and it will open.
WARNING (Continued)
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
To remove the tethered fuel cap,
turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered
fuel cap from the hook on the
fuel door.
Filling the Tank
If the fuel cap is not installed
WARNING
{
properly, the TIGHTEN GAS CAP
message will appear on the Driver
Information Center display. See Fuel
System Messages on page 5‑36.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
When reinstalling the cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks once,
otherwise the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp could turn on.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19.
The cap is behind a locking fuel
door on the passenger side of the
vehicle. The fuel door is locked or
unlocked every time the driver’s
door is locked or unlocked with the
power door locks or the transmitter.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-51
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 10‑113.
WARNING
WARNING
{
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could
be badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks once. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 5‑19.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is
needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer. The
wrong type of fuel cap might not
fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑19.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Driving and Operating
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
Towing
WARNING (Continued)
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact
with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that
has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
WARNING
{
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.
.
Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
.
For information on driving
.
while towing a trailer, see
“Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it
.
For maximum vehicle and trailer
is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
.
For information on equipment
to tow a trailer, see “Towing
Equipment.”
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-53
For information on towing a disabled
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 10‑111. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑111.
The following information has
WARNING (Continued)
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
have been followed. Ask your
dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the
vehicle.
Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle, see
Trailer Towing (Except CTS-V) on
page 9‑57 or Trailer Towing (CTS-V)
on page 9‑58. Trailering changes
handling, acceleration, braking,
durability, and fuel economy. With
the added weight, the engine,
transmission, wheel assemblies,
and tires are forced to work harder
and under greater loads. The
trailer also adds wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
For safe trailering, correctly use the
proper trailering equipment.
.
There are many laws, including
speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
WARNING
{
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine, axle, or other parts could
be damaged.
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well — or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may
also be damaged; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
only if all the steps in this section
.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Driving and Operating
.
Vehicles with automatic
transmissions can tow in
Check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains,
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
is recommended. See Manual
Mode on page 9‑29 for more
information. Use a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often.
For vehicles with a manual
transmission, it is better not to
use the highest gear.
electrical connectors, lamps, tires,
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
Passing
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
More passing distance is needed
when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.
.
.
Use the cruise control when
towing.
Obey speed limit restrictions.
Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
Towing with a Stability Control
System
Backing Up
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to
move the trailer to the left, move
that hand to the left. To move the
trailer to the right, move your hand
to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-55
When towing a trailer, the arrows on
the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may
think other drivers are seeing the
signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. For vehicles with manual
transmissions, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of
gear and the parking brake applied,
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10‑24.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this
so the trailer won't strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
Turn Signals When Towing a
Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes, or stopping.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission can tow in
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
is recommended. Shift the
transmission to a lower gear
if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better
not to use the highest gear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Driving and Operating
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
Parking on Hills
Maintenance When Trailer
Towing
WARNING
{
The vehicle needs service more
often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system, and
brake system. It is a good idea to
inspect these before and during
the trip.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into
gear for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
Parking the vehicle on a hill
with the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
If parking the rig on a hill:
Check periodically to see that all
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
.
Start the engine,
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission, or into gear
.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
Shift into a gear, and
.
Release the parking brake.
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10‑24.
for vehicles with a manual
transmission. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill or
into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-57
Maximum trailer weight is
If there are a lot of options,
Trailer Towing
(Except CTS-V and
Coupe)
Before pulling a trailer, there are
three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering
equipment. The weight of additional
optional equipment, passengers,
and cargo in the tow vehicle must
be subtracted from the maximum
trailer weight.
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11
for more information about the
.
The weight of the trailer.
.
.
The weight of the trailer tongue.
Ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9 for
more information.
The total weight on the vehicle's
tires.
vehicle's maximum load capacity.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
450 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.
Speed, altitude, road grades,
outside temperature, special
equipment, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
For a weight-carrying hitch,
the trailer tongue (A) should
weigh 10 to 15 percent of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Driving and Operating
After loading the trailer, weigh
the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Safety Chains
Towing Equipment
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
.
Total Weight on the
Vehicle's Tires
The rear bumper on the vehicle
is not intended for hitches.
Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it.
Use only a frame-mounted hitch
that does not attach to the
bumper.
Inflate the vehicle's tires to the
upper limit for cold tires. These
numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11. Do not go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
.
Will any holes be made in the
body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes
are not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 9‑25.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
Trailer Towing
(CTS-V and Coupe)
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
9-59
Add-on equipment can drain the
vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑41 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑42.
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-1
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24
Overheated Engine
Bulb Replacement
Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
High Intensity Discharge
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3
Accessories and
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
License Plate Lamp (Coupe
and Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
License Plate Lamp
(Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Park Brake and P (Park)
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Coupe and
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS V Coupe and
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS V Wagon) . . . . . 10-52
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Automatic Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Vehicle Care
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Coupe and
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V Coupe and
Tire Pressure Monitor
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
(Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . 10-106
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
When It Is Time for New
Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon) . . . . . . . 10-59
Rear Compartment Fuse
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
(Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Towing
Block (CTS-V Wagon) . . . . . 10-61
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-111
Recreational Vehicle
Wheels and Tires
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-66
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Tire Terminology and
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Tire Pressure Monitor
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
(Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-3
California Proposition
65 Warning
Accessories and
Modifications
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit
your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Adding non‐dealer accessories
to the vehicle can affect vehicle
performance and safety, including
such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems
like antilock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
If doing some of your own service
work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑14.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
WARNING
{
You can be injured and the
This vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑41.
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑42.
.
Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience,
the proper replacement
parts, and tools before
attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date
of any service work performed.
See Maintenance Records on
page 11‑11.
.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
easily confused. If the
wrong fasteners are used,
parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-5
Before closing the hood, be sure all
the filler caps are on properly. Then
pull the hood down and close it
firmly.
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release lever with
this symbol on it. It is located
inside the vehicle on the lower
side of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
find the secondary hood release
lever. The lever is located under
the front edge of the grille near
the center. Push the release
lever up and raise the hood.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-6
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
CTS 3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 3.0 L V6 Engine Similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-7
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
B. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Coupe and Sedan)
on page 10‑41 or Engine
Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on
page 10‑45 or Engine
E. Passenger Compartment
Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on
page 8‑7.
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
(If Equipped) (Not Shown). See
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir (Out of View). See
Brakes on page 10‑27.
F. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑18.
Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS V Wagon) on
page 10‑52.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑19.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.
See Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑25.
M. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑16.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑10.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-8
Vehicle Care
CTS-V 6.2 L V8 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-9
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
D. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106.
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir
(If Equipped) (Not Shown). See
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10‑15.
B. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Coupe and Sedan)
on page 10‑41 or Engine
Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on
page 10‑45 or Engine
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of
View). See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
K. Brake Master Cylinder
Reservoir. See Brakes on
page 10‑27.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10‑10.
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 10‑19.
G. Passenger Compartment
Air Filter. See Passenger
Compartment Air Filter on
page 8‑7.
Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑48 or
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS V Wagon) on
page 10‑52.
M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
(Under Engine Cover). See
Power Steering Fluid on
page 10‑25.
H. Intercooler System Pressure
Cap. See Cooling System on
page 10‑18.
N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 10‑16.
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106.
I. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑18.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-10
Vehicle Care
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to
reinstall engine cover.
2. Pull the engine cover forward
until it is clear of the smaller
piece.
Engine Cover
Engine Cover (CTS)
Engine Cover (CTS-V)
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall engine cover.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine
oil. Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
To remove:
.
Always use engine oil approved
To remove:
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section.
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
The engine cover consists of
two pieces. Only the larger front
piece needs to be removed to
access the engine oil and power
steering fill caps.
2. Raise the right front corner of
the engine cover (B) to release it
from the ball stud.
.
Check the engine oil level
3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward
to slide the rear tabs (C) out from
under the retainers.
regularly and maintain the
proper oil level. See “Checking
Engine Oil” and “When to Add
Engine Oil” in this section.
1. Raise the front of the engine
cover (A) to release it from the
ball studs (B).
4. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-11
.
.
Change the engine oil at the
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑14.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that
you have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
Always dispose of engine oil
properly. See “What to Do with
Used Oil” in this section.
When to Add Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched
area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”
in this section for an explanation
of what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
It is a good idea to check the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
must be on level ground. The
engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
Checking the oil level too soon
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-12
Vehicle Care
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos™
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos™
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos™ is unavailable: In the event
that dexos™ approved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification
specification will show the
dexos™ symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil or equivalent can
result in engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
If you are unsure whether the
oil is approved to the dexos™
specification, ask your service
provider.
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Use of oils that do not meet the
dexos™ specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
Use and ask for engine oils with
the dexos™ certification mark. Oils
meeting the requirements of the
vehicle should have the dexos™
certification mark on the container.
This certification mark indicates that
the oil has been approved to the
dexos™ specification.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not
use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
This vehicle was filled at the factory
with dexos™ approved engine oil.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-13
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
be used. An oil of this viscosity
grade will provide easier cold
starting for the engine at extremely
low temperatures. When selecting
an oil of the appropriate viscosity
grade, be sure to always select
an oil that meets the required
specification, dexos™. See
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
“Specification” earlier in this
section for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine
Oil Flushes
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos™
specification and displaying the
dexos™ certification mark are all
that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an
area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-14
Vehicle Care
and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
The system is reset when the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message goes off.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For
the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not been reset. Repeat
the procedure.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished,
it indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑35.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles).
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
The vehicle is not equipped with a
transmission fluid level dipstick.
There is a special procedure
for checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this
procedure is difficult, it should be
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
2. Fully press and release the
accelerator pedal three times
within five seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-15
done at the dealer service
See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for the
proper fluid to use.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for the proper fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. The fluid
requires changing every two years.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
department. Contact your dealer
for additional information or refer
to the procedure in the service
manual. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 13‑14.
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly
check clutch fluid unless you
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2, and be
sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
suspect there is a leak in the
How to Check and Add Fluid
system. Adding fluid will not correct
a leak. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Visually check the clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The hydraulic
clutch fluid system should be closed
and sealed.
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
When to Check and What
to Use
Manual Transmission
Fluid
Do not remove the cap to check
the fluid level or to top‐off the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer
for service. Have it repaired as
soon as possible. You may also
have the fluid level checked by
your dealer when the oil is changed.
The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir
cap has this symbol on it. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-16
Vehicle Care
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the
engine compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle, near the front.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for more information
on location.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)
interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more
information. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
1. Turn the ignition off.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the air box.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp
holding the air outlet duct in
place. Do not remove the clamp.
Move the duct aside.
5. Remove the hose from the air
cleaner housing mounting arm.
Move the hose aside.
2. Remove the side cover by
pulling up on the front of the
cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-17
6. Remove the three air cleaner
housing cover screws.
7. Move the air cleaner housing
cover and remove the cover
from the air cleaner housing.
8. Remove the air cleaner filter
from the air cleaner housing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-18
Vehicle Care
8. Attach the electrical connector to
the air box.
How to Reinstall Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
9. Reinstall the side cover.
1. Install the air cleaner into the air
cleaner housing. The outer air
cleaner filter seal must be fitted
properly in the air cleaner
housing.
WARNING
{
When it is safe to lift the hood:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
2. Align the air cleaner housing
cover tabs to the air cleaner
housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing
cover.
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
4. Install the air cleaner housing
cover screws.
5. Install the hose to the air cleaner
housing mounting arm. The hose
must be routed correctly.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)
(Out of View)
6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct
to the air cleaner housing.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet
duct screw clamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-19
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
Engine Coolant
WARNING
{
The cooling system in the vehicle
for all engines and the intercooler
is filled with DEX-COOL®. This
coolant is designed to remain in the
vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km
(150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑24.
warranty. Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
WARNING
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-20
Vehicle Care
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
Never dispose of engine coolant
by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground, or into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water.
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized service center, familiar
with legal requirements regarding
used coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
health.
What to Use
WARNING
{
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
.
Gives freezing protection down
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up
to 129°C (265°F), engine
temperature.
Checking Coolant
.
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Protects against rust and
corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
The engine coolant reservoir is
located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6.
.
Helps keep the proper engine
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the surge tank. If the coolant inside
the surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant
level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-21
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done.
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
WARNING (Continued)
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever
have to turn the pressure cap.
If the engine is warm or hot, the
coolant level should be at or above
the FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank. If the
engine is cold, the coolant level
should be near the FROID/FULL
COLD line on the side of the coolant
surge tank. If it is not, there could
be a leak in the cooling system.
WARNING
{
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
If coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
coolant surge tank.
How to Add Coolant to the
Surge Tank
If no coolant is visible in the surge
tank, add coolant as follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Steam and scalding liquids from
a hot cooling system can blow
out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you
turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never
slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-22
Vehicle Care
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the
FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is
not tightly installed, coolant loss
and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper mixture, to slightly
above the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant
surge tank.
Recheck the coolant level in the
bottle next time you use your
vehicle to ensure the system is full
when cold.
4. With the coolant surge tank
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. The upper radiator
hose is the top hose coming out
of the radiator, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Watch out for
the engine cooling fans.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-23
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
Checking Coolant in the
Intercooler System (CTS-V)
Adding Coolant to the
Intercooler System
Coolant (CTS-V)
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL
coolant mixture to the fill neck
until the coolant is within the
cold fill region.
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
The super charged engine
With the intercooler system
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run for a couple
of minutes. Then turn the engine
off. By this time, the coolant
level inside the fill neck may be
lower. If the level drops where
coolant is no longer within the
cold fill region of the fill neck
with the engine off, add more of
the DEX-COOL coolant mixture
to the fill neck until the level is
again visible in the cold fill
region.
intercooler coolant fill neck is
located in the engine compartment
on the passenger side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6.
On the coolant fill neck, there
is a cold fill region between the
two horizontal lines shown.
Check to see if coolant is visible
in the coolant fill neck. If the coolant
is not visible or below the cold
fill region in the fill neck, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
coolant fill bottle, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before this
is done.
1. Remove the intercooler
system pressure cap when the
intercooler system hoses are no
longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. This allows any pressure
still left to be vented.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-24
Vehicle Care
4. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
If you do decide to lift the hood,
make sure the vehicle is parked on
a level surface.
If Steam Is Coming from the
Engine Compartment
Notice: If the pressure cap is
not tightly installed, coolant loss
and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
Then check to see if the engine
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan(s)
should be running. If they are not,
do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
WARNING
{
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If the coolant is not at the proper
level when the system cools down
again, see your dealer.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with no
coolant, the vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
There are two engine hot messages
that may be displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Engine Cooling System Messages
on page 5‑35 for more information.
You may decide not to lift the hood
when one of these warnings appear,
but get service help right away.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-25
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone
or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front
of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
This operating mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to a safe place
in an emergency. Should a hot
engine condition exist, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, there is a loss in power
and engine performance. Driving
extended distances and/or towing a
trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
If the warning continues, pull
over, stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
.
Stops after high-speed driving.
.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes while
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine
until it cools down. Also, see
“Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” next in this
section.
.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed
with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
Power Steering Fluid
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off
the road, shift to P (Park)
or N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6 for the location of the
power steering fluid reservoir.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-26
Vehicle Care
The level should be between the
HOT and COLD marks. If necessary,
add only enough fluid to bring the
level between the marks.
When to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Adding Washer Fluid
The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
FLUID message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the fluid level is low. See
Washer Fluid Messages on
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the
system or you hear an unusual
noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to
use, see Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. Always
use the proper fluid.
page 5‑46 for more information.
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid
Washer Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
What to Use
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down.
When adding windshield washer
fluid to the vehicle, be sure to read
the manufacturer's instructions
before use. If you will be operating
your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag.
protection against freezing.
4. Replace the cap and completely
tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-27
Notice:
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when
the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Brakes
.
When using concentrated
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear
and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 12‑2.
.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
WARNING
{
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank
only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion
if freezing occurs, which
could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-28
Vehicle Care
The braking performance expected
can change in many other ways if
the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
There are only two reasons why
the brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
.
The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
Brake Fluid
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front
.
A fluid leak in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later
the brakes will not work well.
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for the location of the
reservoir.
Do not top off the brake fluid.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
and rear brakes — for the worse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-29
What to Add
Notice:
WARNING
{
.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7.
Using the wrong fluid
can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
drops of mineral-based oil,
such as engine oil, in the
brake hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
WARNING
{
When the brake fluid falls to a low
level, the brake warning light comes
on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5‑22.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the
vehicle's painted surfaces,
the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-30
Vehicle Care
After a power loss, such as
Vehicle Storage
Battery
disconnecting the battery or
removing the maxi fuses in the
power distribution fuse block, the
following steps must be performed
to calibrate the electronic throttle
control. If this is not done, the
engine will not run properly.
The battery is in the trunk, behind
the trim panel, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. Refer to the
replacement number shown on the
original battery label when a new
battery is needed.
WARNING
{
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 10‑106 for tips on working
around a battery without
1. Turn the ignition on but do not
start the engine.
DANGER
{
getting hurt.
Battery posts, terminals, and
2. Leave the ignition on for at
least three minutes so that the
electronic throttle control will
cycle and re-learn its home
position.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
3. Turn the ignition off.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
4. Start and run the engine for at
least 30 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-31
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
All-Wheel Drive
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
to determine what kind of lubricant
to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
If your vehicle is equipped with
all-wheel-drive, this is an additional
system that needs lubrication.
Transfer Case
Starter Switch Check
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly
check the transfer case fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss
could indicate a problem. Have it
inspected and repaired.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
If the level is below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, located on
the transfer case, you'll need to
add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-32
Vehicle Care
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
3. For automatic transmission
vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in P (Park) or
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
WARNING
{
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the
ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
your dealer for service.
For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
contact your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-33
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition
to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check
WARNING
{
.
To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
.
The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
.
With the key access ignition
.
To check the P (Park)
system, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
See Ignition Positions (Key
Access) on page 9‑17 or Ignition
Positions (Keyless Access) on
page 9‑18.
mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Contact your dealer if service is
required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-34
Vehicle Care
6. Replace the blade with a
new one.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
It is a good idea to clean or replace
the wiper blade assembly on a
regular basis or when worn. For
proper windshield wiper blade
length and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11‑9.
To replace the wiper blade
assembly:
4. Lift up the wiper blade
assembly cap.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
5. Pull the wiper blade assembly
down far enough to release it
from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm. Slide the assembly
away from the arm.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade
assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the
J-hooked end. Pull up on the
assembly to lock it into place.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers
and turn them off again when
the wipers are in the out-wipe
position. The driver side blade
will be straight up and down on
the windshield.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
8. Repeat the steps for the other
wiper.
3. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-35
The vehicle should:
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
Headlamp Aiming
.
Be placed so the headlamps
The vehicle has a visual optical
headlamp aiming system. The aim
has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
are 7.6 m (25 ft) from a light
colored wall.
.
Have all four tires on a level
To adjust the vertical aim:
surface which is level all the way
to the wall.
However, if the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10‑5 for more information.
.
Be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.
.
Not have any snow, ice, or mud
on it.
If oncoming vehicles flash their
high beams at you, this may also
mean the vertical aim needs to be
adjusted.
.
Be fully assembled and have
all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being
performed.
It is recommended that the vehicle
is taken to your dealer for service if
the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible, however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
.
Be loaded with a full tank of
fuel and one person or 75 kg
(160 lbs) sitting on the
driver seat.
Halogen Headlamps
.
Have all tires properly inflated.
.
Have the spare tire (if equipped)
in its original location in the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-36
Vehicle Care
aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the
headlamp being aimed to be
seen on the flat surface.
4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
the width of the vehicle at the
wall where it was marked in
Step 4.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low‐beam headlamp.
Driver Side Shown
3. Record the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly. They are covered by
rubber caps.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a 6 mm hex driver.
6. Turn on the low-beam
headlamps and place a piece
of cardboard or equivalent in
front of the headlamp not being
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-37
Turn it clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or
lower the angle of the beam.
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10‑39.
The top edge of the cut-off
should be positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line.
WARNING
{
For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
The low beam high intensity
discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage.
If you try to service any of the
system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your
dealer or a qualified technician
service them.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions
on the bulb package.
After an HID headlamp bulb has
been replaced, the beam might be a
slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the
left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-38
Vehicle Care
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by lifting the
two plastic clips.
Fog Lamps
License Plate Lamp
(Coupe and Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Remove the bulb socket from
the lamp housing by turning the
bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp
housing keeping the bulb
To replace a front fog lamp bulb:
straight as you pull it out.
1. Pull out the push-pins located on
the underside of the protection
shield to remove the shield.
6. Install a new bulb.
1. Push the tab to remove the
license plate lamp.
7. Reinstall the electrical connector
by pushing in the two plastic
clips.
2. Reach up behind the front
bumper area from under the
vehicle to access the lamp
housing.
2. Turn the license plate lamp
assembly down to remove it.
8. Push the bulb socket into the
lamp housing and turn the
socket one‐quarter turn
clockwise.
3. Turn the socket
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to
remove it.
5. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp
assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-39
7. Turn the lamp assembly into
the liftgate engaging the clip
side first.
License Plate Lamp
(Wagon)
To replace one of these bulbs:
8. Push on the lamp side opposite
the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Wagon) on page 2‑21 for more
information.
Replacement Bulbs
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number
Fog Lamp (Up
H11LL
A. Bulb Socket
B. Bulb
Level Only)
License Plate Lamp
W5WLL
C. Lamp Assembly
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer.
4. Turn the bulb socket (A)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the lamp assembly (C).
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of
the bulb socket.
Passenger Side Shown, Driver
Side Similar
6. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to
install it into the lamp assembly.
2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly towards the right.
3. Turn the lamp assembly down to
remove it from the liftgate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-40
Vehicle Care
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
the following in the vehicle:
Windshield Wipers
Electrical System
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
.
Windshield Wiper Motor
.
Power Windows and Other
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the
windshield wipers.
Power Accessories
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed.
This greatly reduces the chance of
circuit overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
If there is a problem on the road
and a fuse needs to be replaced,
the same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-41
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS
Coupe and Sedan) on page 10‑41
or Engine Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS V Coupe and Sedan) on
page 10‑45 or Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS Wagon) on
page 10‑48 or Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS V Wagon) on
page 10‑52 and Rear Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS Coupe and
Sedan) on page 10‑55 or Rear
Compartment Fuse Block (CTS-V
Coupe and Sedan) on page 10‑57
or Rear Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS Wagon) on page 10‑59 or
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
(CTS-V Wagon) on page 10‑61.
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Fuses of the same amperage
can be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse goes
out. Replace the fuse as soon as
you can.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS Coupe
and Sedan)
The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-42
Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Body Control
Module 5
26
Body Control
Module 4
27
28
29
Navigation Motor
All-Wheel Drive
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
30
31
Horn
Left Low‐Beam
Headlamp
(Domestic
33
34
Non‐HID Only)
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Pedestrian
Protection System
23
11
(Export Only)
Body Control
Module 1
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)
24
19
22
Body Control
Module 3
35
36
Automatic Forward
Lighting System
(HID Only)
Display
Body Control
Module 2
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-43
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
Right Daytime
Running Lamp,
Windshield
Daytime Running
Lamps (non‐HID),
Left Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
38
50
58
Right Low‐Beam
Headlamp
(Domestic
Washer Pump
40
41
Airbag System
Ignition Switch
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
(HID Only), Right
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
51
52
Non‐HID Only)
59
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Engine Control
Module Ignition,
Transmission
Control Module
Ignition
Low‐Beam Daytime
Running Lamps
(non‐HID), Left
Daytime Running
Lamps (HID), Left
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
60
61
43
Power Moding
(Immobilizer
Module, Ignition
Switch)
Air Quality Sensor,
Inside Rear View
Mirror, Rear
54
Camera
Left High‐Beam
Headlamp
55
56
Not Used
46
47
62
64
Ignition
Windshield Wipers
Right High‐Beam
Headlamp
Steering Wheel
Illumination
Right Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-44
Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Usage
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
79
80
81
Spare
Spare
Spare
65
17
18
37
Blower Motor
Body Control
Module 6, Body
Control Module 7
Rear Window
Defogger
69
Not Used
J-Case
Fuses
70
71
Emissions 1
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
Even Ignition Coils
6
7
8
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
1
2
3
Engine Control
Module
72
73
74
Emissions 2
Brake
9
Odd Ignition Coils
Vacuum Pump
Rear Window
Defogger
4
Transmission
Output Speed
Sensor, Brake
Vacuum Relay
Antilock Brake
System Motor
10
13
14
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
75
5
Not Used
Electric Parking
Brake
76
77
78
Spare
Spare
Spare
12
20
Horn
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
15
16
Not Used
Not Used
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-45
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan
(Series/Parallel)
Daytime Running
Lamps (Non‐HID),
Low‐Beam
21
49
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
32
39
Headlamps (HID)
53
63
66
67
Not Used
Windshield
Washer Pump
Main Ignition
Windshield Wipers
Powertrain
Right Daytime
Running Lamp,
Trailer Turn Signal
42
44
Windshield Wipers
High Speed
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
68
Low‐Beam
(non‐HID), Left
Daytime Running
Lamps (HID), Left
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS V Coupe
and Sedan)
This fuse block is on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
45
48
High‐Beam
Headlamps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-46
Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Body Control
Module 4
27
28
29
Navigation Motor
Not Used
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
30
31
33
Horn
Not Used
Pedestrian
34
Protection System
(Export Only)
Body Control
Module 3
35
36
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Body Control
Module 2
Body Control
Module 1
11
24
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
19
38
40
41
Automatic Forward
Lighting System
(HID Only)
25
26
22
23
Display
Sunroof
Not Used
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Body Control
Module 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-47
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Body Control
Module 6, Body
Left Daytime
Running
Lamps (HID)
55
56
Intercooler Pump
Windshield Wipers
43
69
Control Module 7
Right Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
57
58
Left High‐Beam
Headlamp
70
71
72
73
Emissions 1
46
47
Even Ignition Coils
Odd Ignition Coils
Emissions 2
Left Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
Right High‐Beam
Headlamp
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
(HID Only)
Right Daytime
Running Lamp,
Windshield
59
60
Engine Control
Module
74
50
51
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Washer Pump
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Not Used
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Airbag System
Ignition Switch
Air Quality Sensor,
Inside Rear View
Mirror, Rear
Engine Control
Module Ignition,
Transmission
Control Module
Ignition
61
52
54
Camera
62
64
Ignition
Steering Wheel
Illumination
Power Moding
(Immobilizer
Module, Ignition
Switch)
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-48
Vehicle Care
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
Relays
Usage
1
2
3
Left Daytime
Running Lamp (HID)
44
6
7
8
9
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
45
48
49
Rear Window
Defogger
4
High‐Beam
Headlamps
Not Used
Antilock Brake
System Motor
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
10
13
14
Low‐Beam
Headlamps (HID)
5
Not Used
53
63
66
67
Not Used
12
20
Horn
Electric Parking
Brake
Main Ignition
Windshield Wipers
Powertrain
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
15
16
17
Not Used
Cooling Fan
(Series/Parallel)
Not Used
21
32
39
42
Windshield Wipers
High Speed
Blower Motor
68
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Rear Window
Defogger
18
37
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block (CTS Wagon)
This fuse block is on the left side of
the engine compartment.
Windshield
Washer Pump
Magnetic Ride/
Suspension Control
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-49
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Body Control
Module 1
11
24
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)
19
Automatic Forward
Lighting System
(HID Only)
25
26
22
23
Display
Not Used
Body Control
Module 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-50
Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Body Control
Module 4
Right Low‐Beam
Headlamp
(Domestic
Engine Control
Module Ignition,
Transmission
Control Module
Ignition
27
40
52
28
29
Navigation Motor
All-Wheel Drive
Non‐HID Only)
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
41
43
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
Power Moding
(Immobilizer
Module, Ignition
Switch)
30
31
Low‐Beam Daytime
Running Lamps
(non‐HID), Left
Daytime Running
Lamps (HID), Left
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
54
Horn
55
56
Not Used
Left Low‐Beam
Headlamp
(Domestic
Windshield Wipers
33
34
Right Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
Non‐HID Only)
57
Left High‐Beam
Headlamp
Pedestrian
Protection System
(Export Only)
46
47
50
51
Daytime Running
Lamps (non‐HID),
Left Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
Right High‐Beam
Headlamp
58
Body Control
Module 3
35
36
38
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
(HID Only), Right
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
Body Control
Module 2
Airbag System
Ignition Switch
59
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-51
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
J-Case
Usage
Fuses
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
74
Odd Ignition Coils
60
Antilock Brake
System Motor
Transmission
Output Speed
Sensor, Brake
Vacuum Relay
10
75
Air Quality Sensor,
Inside Rear View
Mirror, Rear
13
Not Used
Electric Parking
Brake
61
14
76
77
78
79
80
81
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Camera
15
16
17
Not Used
62
64
Ignition
Not Used
Steering Wheel
Illumination
Blower Motor
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
65
69
18
37
Body Control
Module 6, Body
Control Module 7
Trailer (Export Only)
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
70
71
Emissions 1
6
7
8
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
1
2
3
Even Ignition Coils
Engine Control
Module
72
73
Brake
Vacuum Pump
9
Emissions 2
Rear Window
Defogger
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-52
Vehicle Care
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
45
5
High‐Beam
Headlamps
48
49
12
20
Horn
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
Daytime Running
Lamps (Non‐HID),
Low‐Beam
Cooling Fan
(Series/Parallel)
21
Headlamps (HID)
53
63
66
67
Not Used
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
32
39
Lift the fuse block cover to access
the fuses.
Main Ignition
Windshield Wipers
Powertrain
Not Used
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Right Daytime
Running Lamp,
Trailer Turn Signal
42
Windshield Wipers
High Speed
68
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Low‐Beam
(non‐HID), Left
Daytime Running
Lamps (HID), Left
Trailer Turn Signal
(Export Only)
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
(CTS V Wagon)
The underhood fuse block is located
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-53
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Body Control
Module 4
27
28
29
Navigation Motor
Not Used
Transmission
Control Module
Battery
30
31
33
Horn
Not Used
Pedestrian
34
Protection System
(Export Only)
Body Control
Module 3
35
36
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Body Control
Module 2
Body Control
Module 1
11
24
Antilock Braking
System (ABS)
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
19
38
40
41
Automatic Forward
Lighting System
(HID Only)
25
26
22
23
Display
Sunroof
Not Used
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
Body Control
Module 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-54
Vehicle Care
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Emissions 1
Left Daytime
Running
Lamp (HID)
Right Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
70
71
72
73
57
43
Even Ignition Coils
Odd Ignition Coils
Emissions 2
Left Low‐Beam
(HID Only)
58
59
Left High‐Beam
Headlamp
46
47
50
51
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
(HID Only)
Engine Control
Module
Right High‐Beam
Headlamp
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
Not Used
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
60
61
Airbag System
Ignition Switch
Air Quality Sensor,
Inside Rear View
Mirror, Rear
Engine Control
Module Ignition,
Transmission
Control Module
Ignition
Camera
52
62
64
Ignition
Steering Wheel
Illumination
Power Moding
(Immobilizer
Module, Ignition
Switch)
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
54
65
69
6
7
8
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
Body Control
Module 6, Body
Control Module 7
55
56
Intercooler Pump
Windshield Wipers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-55
J-Case
Fuses
Usage
Not Used
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Low‐Beam
Headlamps (HID)
Rear Window
Defogger
4
49
9
Antilock Brake
System Motor
Instrument Panel
Auxiliary Power
Outlet
53
63
66
67
Not Used
10
13
14
5
Main Ignition
Windshield Wipers
Powertrain
Not Used
12
20
Horn
Electric Parking
Brake
Headlamp Washer
(HID Only)
Windshield Wipers
High Speed
68
15
16
17
Not Used
Cooling Fan
(Series/Parallel)
Not Used
21
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Coupe and
Sedan)
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on top of the battery, on the
right side of the trunk. The battery
access door must be removed to
access the fuse block.
Blower Motor
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
32
39
42
Rear Window
Defogger
18
37
Not Used
Magnetic Ride/
Suspension Control
Right Daytime
Running Lamp
Left Daytime
Running Lamp (HID)
Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan 2
Cooling Fan 1
Starter
44
45
48
1
2
3
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Front Fog Lamps
(HID Only)
High‐Beam
Headlamps
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-56
Vehicle Care
Relays
Usage
Sedan Trunk
Release/Coupe
Rear Fog
11
(Export Only)
12
13
Side Marker Lamps
Left Position Lamps
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
14
15
16
Right Position Lamp
Left Position Lamp
Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
17
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
Module
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
18
Fuel Door Unlock
(Export Only)
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
8
5
(Export Only)
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
6
7
Door Lock
19
20
21
Trunk Release
9
Door Unlock
Easy Entry Seats
(Coupe Only)
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
10
Sunroof
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-57
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
22
33
Power Steering
Column
4
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Theft Deterrent
System/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
23
Left Rear Window
Switch
34
32
37
Audio System
(Radio)
24
25
Right Rear Window
Switch
Memory Seat
Module
Airbag System
35
36
Remote Keyless
Entry/PASS‐Key®
Theft Deterrent
Module
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V Coupe and
Sedan)
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on top of the battery, on the
right side of the trunk. The battery
access door must be removed to
access the fuse block.
Passenger Door
Module
26
38
39
Not Used
Amplifier
Audio Speakers/
Subwoofer
OnStar® System
(If Equipped)
27
28
29
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Driver Power Seat
Switch
Engine Control
Module
1
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Passenger Power
Seat Switch
30
31
Canister Vent
Fuel Pump
2
3
Power Windows
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-58
Vehicle Care
Relays
Usage
Sedan Trunk
Release/Coupe
Rear Fog
11
(Export Only)
12
13
Side Marker Lamps
Left Position Lamps
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
14
15
16
Right Position Lamp
Left Position Lamp
Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
17
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
Module
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
18
Fuel Door Unlock
(Export Only)
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
8
5
(Export Only)
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
6
7
Door Lock
19
20
21
Trunk Release
9
Door Unlock
Easy Entry Seats
(Coupe Only)
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
10
Fuel Pump
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-59
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
22
33
Power Steering
Column
4
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Theft Deterrent
System/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
23
Left Rear Window
Switch
34
32
37
Audio System
(Radio)
24
25
Right Rear Window
Switch
Memory Seat
Module
Airbag System
35
36
Remote Keyless
Entry/PASS‐Key®
Theft Deterrent
Module
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS Wagon)
This fuse block is on the right side
of the vehicle, behind the trim panel
in the rear compartment.
Passenger Door
Module
26
38
39
Not Used
Amplifier
Audio Speakers/
Subwoofer
OnStar® System
(If Equipped)
27
28
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Driver Power Seat
Switch
Engine Control
Module
1
29
30
31
Passenger Power
Seat Switch
Canister Vent
2
3
Rear Differential
Cooling Pump
Power Windows
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-60
Vehicle Care
Relays
11
Usage
Not Used
12
Side Marker Lamps
Left Position Lamps
13
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
14
15
16
Right Position Lamp
Left Position Lamp
Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
17
18
19
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
Module
(Export Only)
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Rear Windshield
Wiper/Washer
Fuel Door Unlock
(Export Only)
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
8
5
Windshield
Washer Pump
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
6
7
Door Lock
20
21
9
Door Unlock
Sunroof
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-61
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
22
33
3
Power Windows
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
Theft Deterrent
System/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
Power Steering
Column
23
4
34
Audio System
(Radio)
Left Rear Window
Switch
24
25
32
37
Memory Seat
Module
Airbag System
Right Rear Window
Switch
35
36
Remote Keyless
Entry/PASS‐Key®
Theft Deterrent
Module
Passenger Door
Module
26
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V Wagon)
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on the passenger side of the
vehicle, behind the trim panel in the
rear compartment.
Rear Auxiliary
Power Outlet
38
39
Audio Speakers/
Subwoofer
OnStar® System
(If Equipped)
27
28
29
Amplifier
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses and relays
shown.
Engine Control
Module
Driver Power Seat
Switch
1
2
30
31
Canister Vent
Fuel Pump
Passenger Power
Seat Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-62
Vehicle Care
Relays
11
Usage
Not Used
12
Side Marker Lamps
Left Position Lamps
13
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
14
15
16
Right Position Lamp
Left Position Lamp
Door Lock
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
17
18
19
Rear Fog/Export
Body Control
Module
(Export Only)
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Rear Windshield
Wiper/Washer
Fuel Door Unlock
(Export Only)
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
8
5
Windshield
Washer Pump
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
6
7
Door Lock
20
21
9
Door Unlock
Fuel Pump
Console/Auxiliary
Power Outlet
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-63
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Mini‐Fuses
Usage
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
Right Position Lamp
(Export Only)
30
Canister Vent
22
Driver Power Seat
Switch
Rear Differential
Cooling Pump
1
31
33
Regulated Voltage
Control Sensor
23
Passenger Power
Seat Switch
Stop Lamps
(Export Only)
2
3
4
Audio System
(Radio)
24
25
Power Windows
Theft Deterrent
System/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
Airbag System
Power Steering
Column
34
Remote Keyless
Entry/PASS‐Key®
Theft Deterrent
Module
Left Rear Window
Switch
26
32
37
Memory Seat
Module
35
36
Right Rear Window
Switch
Audio Speakers/
Subwoofer
OnStar® System
Passenger Door
Module
27
28
29
Rear Auxiliary
Power Outlet
38
39
Engine Control
Module
Amplifier
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-64
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires
WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
.
Under inflated tires pose the
same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when the
tires are cold.
Improperly repaired tires
can cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about
your tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer.
.
Do not spin the tires in
excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
.
Over inflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
WARNING
{
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed
Operation on page 10‑73 for
inflation pressure adjustment for
high-speed driving.
.
Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
.
.
Worn or old tires can cause
a crash. If the tread is badly
worn, replace them.
.
Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11.
Replace any tires that have
been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-65
If you choose to use winter tires:
You may also notice more
road noise with low‐profile
performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
Winter Tires
.
Use tires of the same brand and
If you expect to drive on snow or ice
covered roads often, you may want
to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall
performance on most surfaces but
they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of
performance as winter tires on snow
or ice covered roads.
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
.
Use only radial ply tires of the
Notice: If the vehicle has
low‐profile tires, they are more
susceptible to damage from
road hazards or curb impact
than standard profile tires.
Tire and/or wheel assembly
damage can occur when
coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W, and ZR speed rated tires. If you
choose winter tires with a lower
speed rating, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction on
snow and ice covered roads. With
winter tires, there may be decreased
dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for
changes in vehicle handling and
braking.
Low-Profile Tires
If your vehicle has P235/50R18,
245/45ZR19, P245/45R19,
255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size
tires, they are classified as
low‐profile tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement.
See your dealer for details
regarding winter tire availability
and proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 10‑81.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-66
Vehicle Care
Summer Performance Tires
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Many General Motors high
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
performance models come
factory‐equipped with tires that
are optimized for maximum dry
and wet road performance while
still retaining satisfactory tread
life, excellent durability, and low
noise levels. In severe winter
climates where snowfall may be
significant, these tires may be
found to provide less traction.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire
is molded into its sidewall. The
examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-67
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
and gone flat. If the vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑106 andIf a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑87.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(C) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on
three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and
temperature resistance. For
more information see Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 10‑83.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 miles) and should not be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-68
Vehicle Care
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
(E) Tire Inflation: The
Tire Designations
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72.
sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Size
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
number that indicates the tire
height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
The following is an example
of a typical passenger vehicle
tire size.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-69
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
Accessory Weight: This
means the combined weight
of optional accessories.
Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 10‑72.
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Curb Weight: The weight of
a motor vehicle with standard
and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
expressed in psi (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-70
Vehicle Care
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑11.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11.
Maximum Load Rating: The
load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-71
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire's traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire
manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑72
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire
that comes into contact with
the road.
page 10‑83.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑11.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑80.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-72
Vehicle Care
.
.
Poor handling.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11.
For additional information
regarding how much weight
the vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑11. How
you load the vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride
Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires
that have too much air, can
result in:
.
Unusual wear.
.
Poor handling.
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
.
Rough ride.
.
Tire Pressure
Needless damage from
road hazards.
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
When to Check
A vehicle-specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle. This
label shows the vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for
the tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount of
air pressure needed to support
the vehicle's maximum load
carrying capacity.
Check the tires once a month or
more. Do not forget to check the
compact spare tire, if the vehicle
has one. The compact spare
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 10‑106.
Notice: Neither tire
underinflation or overinflation
are good. Underinflated tires,
or tires that do not have
enough air, can result in:
.
Tire overloading and
over-heating which could
lead to a blowout.
.
Premature or
irregular wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-73
How to Check
If you overfill the tire, release
air by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re‐check the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
WARNING (Continued)
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if the tires are
properly inflated simply by
inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When
speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure
the tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the
looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps
look properly inflated even when
they are underinflated. Check
the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. Cold means
the vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
back on the valve stems. They
help prevent leaks by keeping
out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure for
High-Speed Operation
vehicle load.
If your vehicle has 255/40ZR19 or
285/35ZR19 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment
when driving your vehicle at speeds
of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher.
Set the cold inflation pressure
WARNING
{
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h
(100 mph) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you
or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require
to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall,
or 300 kPa (44 psi), whichever is
lower. See the example following.
When you end this high-speed
driving, return the tires to the cold
tire inflation pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-74
Vehicle Care
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9‑11 and Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72.
Each tire, including the spare
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Example:
You will find the maximum load and
inflation pressure molded on the
tire's sidewall, in small letters,
near the rim flange. It will read
something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)
Max. Press.
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
For this example, you would set the
inflation pressure for high‐speed
driving at 44 psi (300 kPa).
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under‐inflated.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-75
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑18 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission
(FCC) rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When a low tire pressure condition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument panel
cluster. If the warning light comes
on, stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the tire loading
information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑11.
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the
spare tire and wheel assembly,
if the vehicle has one. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle's tires and transmits the
tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 10‑75 for
additional information.
Using the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the driver can also check tire
pressure levels using the DIC. For
additional information and details
about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 5‑27 and Tire
Messages on page 5‑44.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-76
Vehicle Care
A DIC warning message to check
the pressure in a specific tire is also
shown on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come
at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 10‑78, Tire Rotation on
page 10‑79 and Tires on
TPMS Malfunction Light and
Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays
on for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message is
also displayed. The malfunction light
and DIC warning message come
on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of
the conditions that can cause the
malfunction light and DIC message
to come on are:
page 10‑64.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage
caused by using an incorrect tire
sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
only the GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer or
included in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the
proper pressure.
The Tire and Loading Information
label, attached to your vehicle,
shows the size of your vehicle's
original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressure for the
tires when they are cold. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11,
for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its
location on your vehicle. Also see
Tire Pressure on page 10‑72.
.
One of the road tires has been
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑89 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
replaced with the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. The
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction
light and the DIC message
should go off once you re‐install
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-77
.
Replacement tires or wheels do
not match your vehicle's original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for your vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 10‑81.
the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor
Matching Process” later in this
section.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
the TPMS sensor matching process
should be performed after replacing
a spare tire with a road tire
containing the TPMS sensor in
order for the malfunction light and
the DIC message to go off at the
next ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
following order: driver side front tire,
passenger side front tire, passenger
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
See your dealer for service.
.
The TPMS sensor matching
process was not done or not
completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle's tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process. See
“TPMS Sensor Matching
.
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer for
service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
Process” later in this section.
.
One or more TPMS sensors
are missing or damaged. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
your dealer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-78
Vehicle Care
There are two minutes to match
the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match
all four tire/wheel positions. If it
takes longer, the matching process
stops and must be restarted.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that you
regularly inspect the vehicle's
tires, including the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, for signs
of wear or damage at least
once a month.
6. Proceed to the passenger
side front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS matching process is
outlined below:
7. Proceed to the passenger
side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
Always remove the tires if any
of the following statements
are true:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 5. After hearing the
confirming horn chirp, for the
driver side rear tire, the horn
sounds two more times to signal
the tire learning mode is no
longer active.
.
You can see the indicators at
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's lock and
unlock buttons at the same time
for approximately five seconds.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and Tire Learning Active
three or more places around
the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire's
rubber.
message displays on the DIC
screen.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
.
The tread or sidewall is
10. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire
and loading information label.
cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
4. Start with the driver side
front tire.
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button to
activate the TPMS sensor.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-79
.
The tire has a puncture, cut,
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
Tire rotation is recommended if
the vehicle has the same size
tires on all four wheel positions.
These tires should be rotated
every 12 000 km (7,500 miles).
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2.
Tire Rotation
Tire rotation is not
The purpose of a regular tire
rotation is to achieve a uniform
wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
continues to perform most like it
did when the tires were new.
recommended if the vehicle has
P235/50R18, 245/45ZR19 or
255/40R19 size tires on the
front wheels and P265/45R18,
275/40ZR19 or 285/35R19 size
tires on the rear wheels.
Use the rotation pattern shown
here when rotating tires of the
same size installed on all
four wheel positions.
Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon
as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 10‑80 and Wheel
Replacement on page 10‑85.
Different tire sizes should not
be rotated front to rear. Each
tire and wheel should only be
used in its original front or rear
position.
The compact spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, is not included
in the tire rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-80
Vehicle Care
After the tires have been
When It Is Time for New
Tires
WARNING
{
rotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72 and Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9‑11.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑87.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence when
you need new tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. See Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 10‑75.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
Lightly coat the center of the
wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which appear when the
tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or
less of tread remaining. See Tire
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-81
Inspection on page 10‑79 and
Tire Rotation on page 10‑79 for
additional information.
Parking for an extended period
can cause flat spots on the tires
that may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires
or raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
specifications that impact the
overall performance of your
The rubber in tires age over
vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size.
If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by an MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 10‑66, for
time. This is also true for the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one,
even if it is not being used. Multiple
conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including
temperatures, loading conditions,
and inflation pressure maintenance.
Tires will typically need to be
replaced due to wear before they
may need to be replaced due to
age. Consult the tire manufacturer
for more information on when tires
should be replaced.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle. The
original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system
rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC
Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that
are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original
tires.
additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in
sets of four. This is because uniform
tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most
like it did when the tires were new.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-82
Vehicle Care
Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling
performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑78 and
Tire Rotation on page 10‑79.
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving. If you
mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on
your vehicle), brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly,
and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes
(other than those originally
installed on your vehicle), brands
or types, may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the correct size, brand, and type
tires on all four wheels.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
WARNING
{
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to
mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your
dealer or authorized tire service
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
If you must replace your vehicle's
tires with those that do not have
a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give an
inaccurate low‐pressure warning
if non‐TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on it. Non‐TPC Spec
rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than
the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 10‑75.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as your original equipment
tires may not be available for H, V,
W and ZR speed rated tires. If you
choose snow tires with a lower
speed rating, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
WARNING
{
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-83
Your vehicle's original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑11,
for more information about the Tire
and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle.
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Different Size Tires and
Wheels
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires, this
could affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock
brakes, traction control, and
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), which grades tires
by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls
of most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
All Passenger Car Tires Must
Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
electronic stability control, the
performance of these systems can
be affected.
See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑81 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 10‑3 for
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-84
Vehicle Care
Treadwear
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
The temperature grades
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on
a specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1½) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure.
driving habits, service practices
and differences in road
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-85
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Wheel Replacement
Balance
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
The tires and wheels on your
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it,
except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired.
See your dealer if any of these
conditions exist.
vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall
performance. Adjustments to wheel
alignment and tire balancing will not
be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual
tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment
might need to be checked. If you
notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be
Your dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
CTS-V models should only use
adhesive wheel weights to balance
the tires and wheels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-86
Vehicle Care
If you need to replace any of the
wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,
or Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) sensors, replace them only
with new GM original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for
the vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and
chassis.
Tire Chains
WARNING
{
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle and
you or others may be injured
in a crash. Use another type
of traction device only if its
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑87 for more information.
WARNING
{
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts on the vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of the
vehicle, make the tires lose air
and make you lose control. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
WARNING
{
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
manufacturer recommends it for
use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-87
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently brake to a
stop, well off the road, if possible.
If a Tire Goes Flat
WARNING (Continued)
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle's tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid
damage to the vehicle, drive
slowly, re‐adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the
vehicle, and do not spin the
wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on
the rear tires.
WARNING
{
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has
been driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause
a blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot
off the accelerator pedal and grip
the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-88
Vehicle Care
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING (Continued)
{
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting
Changing a tire can be
To be certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from
the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people.
You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a
level place to change the tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare
tire safely, follow the instructions
below. Then see Tire Changing on
page 10‑98. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10‑89.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-89
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
WARNING (Continued)
and compressor kit instructions
and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not
exceed the recommended
pressure.
WARNING
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
Exhaust on page 9‑25.
WARNING
{
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store the tire
sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
WARNING
{
Overinflating a tire could cause
the tire to rupture and you or
others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the tire sealant
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-90
Vehicle Care
The tire sealant and compressor
can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be
used to inflate an under inflated tire.
The kit includes:
A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air
or Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gauge
D. Pressure Deflation Button
E. Tire Sealant Canister
F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
G. Air Only Hose (Black)
H. Power Plug
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Service
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Service (Mexico) on
page 13‑9.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Read and follow all of the tire
sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-91
There is only enough sealant to seal
one tire. After usage, the sealant
canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See
“Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister” following.
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and
Inflate a Punctured Tire
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑87 for other important
safety warnings.
Follow the directions closely for
correct sealant usage.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Wagon) on page 10‑96 or
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Coupe) on
page 10‑97 or Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Sedan) on page 10‑97.
When using the tire sealant
and compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)
and the power plug (H).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-92
Vehicle Care
3. Place the kit on the ground.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
9. Press the on/off (B) button
to turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
4. Remove the valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
may be turned on/off until the
correct pressure is reached.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Service (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Service
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
The pressure gauge (C) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑72.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-93
The tire is not sealed and
will continue to leak air until
the vehicle is driven and
the sealant is distributed in
the tire, therefore, Steps 12
through 18 must be done
immediately after Step 11.
19. Stop at a safe location and
check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under
“Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not
Punctured).”
16. If the flat tire was able to
inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (E) and place
it in a highly visible location. Do
not exceed the speed on this
label until the damaged tire is
repaired or replaced.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor kit
as it could be warm after
usage.
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Service (U.S.
and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
Roadside Service (Mexico) on
page 13‑9.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
17. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
14. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
15. Replace the sealant/air
hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original
location.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the
wheel, tire, and vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-94
Vehicle Care
21. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (E) and sealant/air
hose (F) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4.
22. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 10‑87 for other important
safety warnings.
23. After temporarily sealing the
tire using the tire sealant and
compressor kit, take the
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Wagon) on page 10‑96 or
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit (Coupe) on
page 10‑97 or Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit
(Sedan) on page 10‑97.
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 miles) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H).
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-95
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap
from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Turn the selector switch (A)
clockwise to the Air Only
position.
If you inflate the tire higher
than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the
excess pressure by pressing
the pressure deflation
button (D) until the proper
pressure reading is reached.
This option is only functional
when using the air only
hose (G).
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until it is tight.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to
turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.
10. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑72.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit off.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
Be careful while handling the
tire sealant and compressor
kit as it could be warm after
usage.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
The pressure gauge (C) may
read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
13. Disconnect the air only
hose (G) from the tire
valve stem, by turning it
counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-96
Vehicle Care
14. Replace the air only hose (G)
and the power plug (H) and
cord back in its original
location.
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
15. Place the equipment in the
original storage location in the
vehicle.
2. Press the canister release
button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister
which is available from your
dealer.
A. Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
5. Push the new canister into
place.
B. Foam Container
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
(Wagon)
C. Subwoofer (Optional)
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Wagon) on page 2‑21.
2. Pull up on the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) to remove it
from the foam container (B).
The tire sealant and compressor
kit is located in the rear of the
vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-97
It is not necessary to remove
the subwoofer (C) to access
the tire sealant and compressor
kit, however, if you want to
remove it see Tire Changing on
page 10‑98 for instructions.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
(Coupe)
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk.
A. Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
2. Remove the retainer that holds
the tire sealant and compressor
kit in place.
B. Foam Container
C. Wing Nut
3. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from the foam
container.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk
(Sedan, Coupe) on page 2‑19.
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
2. Locate the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) in the center
of the cargo area.
Storing the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit
(Sedan)
3. Remove the wing nut (C) that
holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) in place.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-98
Vehicle Care
4. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit (A) from the foam
container (B).
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
F. Strap
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools (Wagon)
To store the tire sealant and
compressor kit, reverse the steps.
To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:
Tire Changing
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the stow rod cap by
pulling it straight up off of
the rod.
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools (Sedan)
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the
compact spare tire (B)
counterclockwise to remove.
4. Remove the spare tire and place
it next to the flat tire.
5. The tools you will be using next
include the jack (C), wheel
wrench (D), and extension (E).
Sedan
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-99
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
3. Remove the spare tire (B) and
place it next to the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
4. Remove the jack (C), wheel
wrench (E), and extension (F).
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10‑87
D. Subwoofer
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Extension
G. Cable
To remove the jack:
To access the spare tire and jacking
equipment:
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the subwoofer (D),
if the vehicle has one.
To remove the subwoofer:
2.1. Turn the nut (A)
counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Use the wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
1. Remove the retainer nut (A).
2. Remove the jack stowage
bracket (B).
2.2. Disconnect the
connector wire.
3. Slide the jack (C) forward to
remove it from the floor storage
bracket.
2.3. Pull the subwoofer (D) up to
remove it from the stow rod.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-100
Vehicle Care
WARNING
{
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Find the jacking location
using the diagram above and
corresponding V-shaped locating
notches located in the plastic
molding.
4. Insert the hooked end of the
extension handle through the
jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.
WARNING
{
WARNING
{
Getting under a vehicle when it
is jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
Raising the vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-101
Notice: If you position the jack
under the rocker molding and
attempt to raise the vehicle, you
could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your
vehicle. Always position the jack
so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch
located inboard from the rocker
molding.
7. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare
tire to fit under the vehicle.
5. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
jack lift head until the jack fits
under the vehicle.
6. Raise the jack by turning the
wheel wrench clockwise until the
slots in the jack head fit into the
metal flange located behind the
V‐shaped locating notches on
the plastic molding as shown.
9. Remove all the wheel nuts and
the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-102
Vehicle Care
WARNING
14. Lower the vehicle by
turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the
jack completely.
{
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust
or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑87.
WARNING
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
10. Remove any rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on
with the rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Specifications on page 12‑2 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
WARNING
{
13. Tighten each wheel nut by
turning it clockwise with your
hand until the wheel is held
against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-103
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
WARNING
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
4. Route the loop end of the
strap (C) through one of the
cargo tie-downs (A) located in
the rear of the vehicle.
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat
Load Floor (Sedan)
1. Put back all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage
5. Route the hook (B) through the
loop (C).
compartment and put the
compartment cover back on.
6. Pull the strap to tighten it around
the cargo tie-down (A).
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage
bag, if there is one.
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
a crisscross sequence as
shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-104
Vehicle Care
5. Slide both D-rings (E) on each
side of the vehicle as far
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat
Load Floor (Wagon)
rearward as they will go.
1. Return all tools as they were
stored in the rear storage
compartment and put the
compartment cover on.
6. Route one hook (A) under the
wheel spoke (C) and place the
hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the driver side of the
vehicle.
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage
bag, if there is one.
7. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
forward to engage the hook.
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the
rear storage compartment.
8. Route the other hook under the
wheel spoke (D) and place the
hook into the slot in the cargo
rail on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
7. Route the hook end of the strap
through the wheel.
8. Attach the hook to the cargo
tie-down in the rear of the
vehicle.
9. Slide the D-ring (E) on that side
forward to engage the hook.
9. Slide the buckle to tighten the
cargo tie-down strap.
Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire in the trunk.
4. Route one of the hooks (A), at
the end of the cable provided,
through the liftgate striker (B).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-105
Reverse the instructions for
removing the spare tire and tools to
store the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
(Sedan)
Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire and tools in the trunk:
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
(Wagon)
Use the following diagram as a
guide for storing the compact spare
tire and tools in the rear
compartment area:
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Subwoofer
E. Wheel Wrench
F. Extension
G. Strap
A. Wing Nut
B. Compact Spare Tire or Flat Tire
C. Jack
Reverse the instructions for
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
removing the spare tire and tools to
store the compact spare tire.
F. Strap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-106
Vehicle Care
tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size
tire as soon as possible. The spare
tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Compact Spare Tire
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 10‑30.
WARNING
{
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
If the vehicle battery has run down,
you may want to use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
Notice: When the compact spare
is installed, do not take the
vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
WARNING
{
If your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare tire it was fully
inflated when the vehicle was new, it
can lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It should
be 420 kPa (60 psi).
Batteries can hurt you. They can
be dangerous because:
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
.
They contain acid that can
burn you.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels or
tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
.
They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
.
They contain enough
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
5 000 km (3,000 miles), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-107
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
You would not be able to start
your vehicle and the bad
grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in Neutral
before setting the parking brake.
radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
4. Open the hoods and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations or the
Notice: Only use a vehicle
that has a 12-volt system with
a negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
remote positive (+) and remote
negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the
remote positive (+) location on
your vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6 for more information
on locations of the terminals.
Notice: If the radio or other
accessories are left on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can reach,
but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they
are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-108
Vehicle Care
Notice: If you connect a negative
cable to the Engine Control
Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that
attach to the ECM bracket, you
may damage the ECM. Always
attach the negative cable to your
vehicle's remote negative ground
location, instead of the ECM, ECM
bracket, or any cables attached to
the ECM bracket.
WARNING
{
Using an open flame near a
battery can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
WARNING
{
Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) ground location, as
shown in the illustration. It is
located on the left side of the
engine compartment. See
Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10‑6. You should
always use this remote ground
location, instead of the terminal
on the battery.
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-109
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause
sparks.
7. Do not let the other end
WARNING
{
touch metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables
do not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The
other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-110
Vehicle Care
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least 45 cm
(18 in) away from the dead
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting
back to the battery is much less.
2. Disconnect the black
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle's remote
negative (−) ground location
is for this purpose.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (−)
Terminal
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-111
.
.
What is the distance that will be
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Recreational vehicle towing
means towing the vehicle behind
another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common
types of recreational vehicle towing
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dingy towing is towing
the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground. Dolly towing is towing
the vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be
towed with all four wheels off
the ground. Care must be taken
with vehicles that have low
ground clearance and/or special
equipment. Always flatbed on a
car carrier.
Is the proper towing equipment
going to be used? See your
dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be
towed.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
What is the towing capacity
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
of the towing vehicle? Be
sure to read the tow
vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-112
Vehicle Care
Notice: If the vehicle is
Dinghy Towing
Dolly Towing
towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
The vehicle was not designed to be
towed with all four wheels on the
ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle
must be towed, a dolly or a trailer
should be used. If an all-wheel-drive
vehicle must be towed, a trailer
should be used. See “Dolly Towing”
following for more information.
Use the following procedure to dolly
tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from
the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake (Manual) on
page 9‑34 or Parking Brake
(Electric) on page 9‑35.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-113
4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for
an automatic transmission
or in 1 (First) for a manual
transmission.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
5. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the dolly.
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
the Vehicle” later in this section.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will
damage drivetrain components.
Do not tow an all-wheel-drive
vehicle with any of its wheels on
the ground.
Finish Care
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only
be towed with all four wheels on a
trailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-114
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To keep
the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Do not use cleaning
agents that are petroleum based
or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product. Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on
a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam, or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-115
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
would not be covered by the
warranty.
Notice: Conveyor systems on
some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
Notice: Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑7.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
has aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, as this
could cause damage. The repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Keep the wheels clean using a
soft, clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-116
Vehicle Care
Notice: Driving the vehicle
Wipers can be damaged by:
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
.
Heat and sun
Finish Damage
.
Snow and ice, without proper
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
removal
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body and
paint shop.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a
lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-117
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody with
plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer or an
underbody car washing system can
do this.
Permanent damage can result
from using cleaners on surfaces for
which they were not intended. Apply
the cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately.
Interior Care
The interior will continue to look
its best if it is cleaned often. Dust
and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to
the rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Lighter colored interiors may
require more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
interior.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners,
read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While
cleaning the interior, maintain
adequate ventilation by opening the
doors and windows.
Remove dust from small buttons
and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the interior. When
cleaning the interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for
the surfaces that are being cleaned.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-118
Vehicle Care
.
Do not use organic solvents
such as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Damage to the interior may
result
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
.
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
2. Remove excess moisture.
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
.
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to the interior
surfaces.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with a beater bar in the nozzle may
only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
4. Continue to gently rub the
soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide.
.
For liquids: gently blot the
If any of the soil remains, a
remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
.
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care
10-119
A paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
Leather
non-uniform manner.
Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be
used. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do
not use heat, steam, spot lifters or
spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather
may permanently change the
Care of Safety Belts
used. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
Keep belts clean and dry.
WARNING
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-120
Vehicle Care
Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
Floor Mats
.
The original equipment floor
WARNING
{
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
.
Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock the retainer and
remove.
.
Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
mat retainer opening over the
carpet retainer and snap into
position.
.
Use only a single floor mat on
the driver's side.
.
Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
3. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured in place.
Driver side floor mat is held in place
by a button-type retainer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-1
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
.
Carry passengers and cargo
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9‑11.
.
Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Service and Maintenance
.
Use the recommended fuel.
See Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑48.
The proper replacement parts,
fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 and
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11‑9. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
WARNING
{
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Change engine oil and filter.
See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
An Emission Control Service.
Rotation of New Tires
Tire rotation is not recommended if
the vehicle has different size tires
on the front and rear wheels. If tire
rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, to maintain ride, handling,
and performance of the vehicle,
it is important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message displays, service
is required for the vehicle as
soon as possible, within the
next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving
under the best conditions, the
Service Work on page 10‑4.
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system
must be reset. Your dealer has
trained service technicians who
will perform this work and reset the
system. If the engine oil life system
is reset accidentally, service the
vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 miles
since the last service. Reset the oil
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
up‐to‐date tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire
Rotation on page 10‑79.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-3
.
.
Windshield wiper blade
Engine air cleaner filter
inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
life system whenever the oil is
changed. See Engine Oil Life
System on page 10‑14.
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and windshield
and wiper blade cleaning,
if contaminated. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑113. Worn
or damaged wiper blade
.
.
Brake system inspection
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Every Engine Oil Change
.
Change engine oil and filter.
Reset oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑10 and
Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑14. An Emission
Control Service.
Steering and suspension
inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 10‑34.
.
Tire inflation pressures
check. See Tire Pressure on
page 10‑72.
.
Body hinges and latches,
key lock cylinders, folding
seat hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication. See
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when the vehicle
is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
.
.
Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑78.
.
Engine cooling system
inspection. Visual inspection
of hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
If tire rotation is recommended
for the vehicle, rotate tires if
necessary. See Tire Rotation on
page 10‑79.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
Fluids visual leak check
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired and
the fluid level checked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Service and Maintenance
.
.
.
Restraint system component
check. See Safety System
Check on page 3‑28.
Accelerator pedal check for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
Once a Month
.
Tire inflation check. See Tire
Pressure on page 10‑72.
.
.
Fuel system inspection for
damage or leaks.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of
the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10‑89.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire
Inspection on page 10‑78.
Exhaust system and nearby heat
shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
.
Sunroof track and seal
inspection, if equipped. See
Sunroof (Sedan and Wagon) on
page 2‑33 or Sunroof (Coupe)
on page 2‑34.
Additional Required Services
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
.
.
Underbody flushing service.
Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Support Gas Strut Service:
Visually inspect gas strut,
if equipped, for signs of wear,
cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
strut. Contact your dealer if
service is required.
Once a Year
.
Rotate tires. Tires should be
rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation
on page 10‑79.
.
See Starter Switch Check on
page 10‑31.
.
See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 10‑32.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See
Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Once Every Two Years
Check on page 10‑33.
.
Engine coolant level check. See
Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
.
CTS‐V only: Clutch hydraulic
system drain, flush, and refill.
.
See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on
page 10‑33.
.
Windshield washer fluid level
check. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑26.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-5
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles
An Emission Control Service.
The U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency or the
.
.
Passenger compartment air
Engine air cleaner filter
California Air Resources Board
has determined that the failure
to perform this maintenance
item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life. We,
filter replacement (or every
24 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be needed if you drive
in areas with heavy traffic,
areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be
needed if you notice reduced
air flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.
replacement. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in
heavy city traffic in hot weather,
in hilly or mountainous terrain,
when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See
however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 10‑14.
.
CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manual
transmission fluid change
(normal service).
.
Evaporative control system
.
CTS‐V only: 6‐speed manual
inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hook‐up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed.
transmission fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles
mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Service and Maintenance
.
.
All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only:
Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles
mainly driven in heavy city
traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer,
or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. During
any maintenance, if a power
washer is used to clean mud
and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not
directly spray the transfer case
output seals. High pressure
water can overcome the seals
and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the
transfer case and should be
replaced.
CTS‐V only: Supercharger
drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious
damage and replacement,
if needed.
driving, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. See your
dealer.
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After
Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
Automatic transmission fluid
change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 10‑14.
.
Engine cooling system
drain, flush, and refill (or
every five years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 10‑18. An
Emission Control Service.
.
All‐wheel‐drive vehicles only:
Transfer case fluid change
(normal service). During any
maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt
from the underbody, care should
be taken to not directly spray
the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can
.
6.2L supercharged V8 engine
only: Intercooler system
drain, flush, and refill (or
every five years, whichever
occurs first). See Cooling
System on page 10‑18. An
Emission Control Service.
overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case
fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
.
CTS‐V only: Rear axle fluid
change (severe service only)
for vehicles mainly driven in hilly
or mountainous terrain, when
frequently towing a trailer, used
for high speed or competitive
.
Engine drive belts inspection
for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or
every 10 years, whichever
occurs first). Replace, if
needed.
.
Spark plug replacement and
spark plug wire inspection. An
Emission Control Service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-7
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.
Engine Coolant
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Brake System
Windshield Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
DOT 4 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 88958860, in
Canada 88901244).
Hydraulic Clutch System
Manual Transmission (CTS)
Manual Transmission (CTS-V)
Automatic Transmission
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil (GM Part No. 88862475, in Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88861800, in Canada 88861801).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Service and Maintenance
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Rear Drive Module and Transfer Case
Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
(All‐Wheel Drive)
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-9
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.0L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
6.2L V8 Engine
Engine Oil Filter
3.0L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
6.2L V8 Engine
15875795
15875795
25898499
A3096C
A3096C
A3105C
25177917
25177917
89017524
19130403
PF2129
PF2129
PF48
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF133
3.0L V6 Engine
12622561
12622561
12571165
41-109
41-109
41-104
3.6L V6 Engine
6.2L V8 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Service and Maintenance
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Wiper Blades — Except CTS-V
Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in)
Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in)
Wiper Blades — CTS-V
15890062
15890064
—
—
Driver Side – 56.5 cm (22 in)
Passenger Side – 53.3 cm (21 in)
20791461
20791462
—
—
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-11
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service and Maintenance
11-13
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-14
Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Maintenance Stamp
Odometer
Reading
Date
Services Performed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 12‑2 for the vehicle
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the spare tire cover,
has the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
.
.
.
Model designation.
Paint information.
Production options and special
equipment.
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑7 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System — Engine
3.0LV6 Engine
10.3 L
10.3 L
11.8 L
2.3 L
10.9 qt
10.9 qt
12.5 qt
2.4 qt
3.6LV6 Engine
6.2LV8 Engine
Cooling System — Intercooler, 6.2LV8 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
3.0LV6 Engine
5.7 L
5.7 L
5.7 L
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
3.6LV6 Engine
6.2LV8 Engine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
12-3
Capacities
English
18.0 gal
1.1 qt
Application
Metric
68.1 L
1.0 L
Fuel Tank
Transfer Case — AWD
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
3.0LV6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic
3.6LV6 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic
6.2LV8 Engine, 6-Speed Automatic
3.0L, 3.6LV6 Engines, 6-Speed Manual
6.2LV8 Engine, 6-Speed Manual
6.3 L
6.3 L
6.7 qt
6.7 qt
6.3 L
6.7 qt
1.8 L
1.9 qt
3.8 L
4.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-4
Technical Data
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
3.0LV6 Engine
3.6LV6 Engine
6.2LV8 Engine
Y
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Automatic
Manual
D
P
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
1.0 mm (0.040 in)
Automatic
Manual
Engine Drive Belt Routing
CTS-V 6.2L V8 Engine
CTS V6 Engines
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-11
Service Publications
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada)
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to the dealer and to
Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Satisfaction
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Roadside Service
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Scheduling Service
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that
level. If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-16
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a
member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center at 1‐800‐458‐8006. In
Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac
Customer Communication Centre at
1-888-446-2000.
When contacting Cadillac,
remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with
any other venue for relief available
to you.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and the dealer
are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with the
new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program
to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto
Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
.
Vehicle Identification
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although
you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program
prior to filing a court action, use of
the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and
present mileage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-3
STEP THREE — Canadian
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,
or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure (Mexico)
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/arbitration program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe
our impartial program offers
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Did you get the Warranty Extension
Plan? This plan is recommended by
General Motors to supplement the
warranty included with the new
vehicle purchase.
See your dealer for details.
The inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance
Procedure
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
very important to your dealer and
General Motors.
Normally, any problem with the
transaction, sale, or usage of the
vehicle must be handled by your
dealer sales or service departments.
advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal,
quick, and free of charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-4
Customer Information
However, we recognize that
despite the good intentions of all
parties involved, sometimes a
misunderstanding may occur.
STEP THREE
See Customer Assistance Offices
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or
Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more
information.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
dealer, please call the General
Motors Customer Assistance
Center (CAC) and provide the
following information:
If you have a problem that has not
been satisfactorily handled through
the normal means, we suggest the
following steps:
Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada)
.
Name
Cadillac encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,
the letter should be addressed to:
STEP ONE
.
Address
Explain your case to the dealer
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
.
Phone number
.
Model year
.
manager, depending on your case.
Brand
United States
.
Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are
interested in your continual
satisfaction.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
.
Mileage
.
Delivery date
STEP TWO
.
Description of the problem
If you are not satisfied, please
contact the general manager or the
dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve
your case, ask them to contact the
right people at General Motors for
support, if needed.
.
Dealership name
1-800-458-8006
.
Dealership address
1-800-833-2622 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
Mexico
13-5
From Puerto Rico:
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From Mexico City
5329-0816
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
From Other Mexico Locations
General Motors de Mexico, S. de
R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
01-800-466-0816
Canada
United States and Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gm.ca
1-866-466-8195
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Costa Rica
01-800-466-0805
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805
00-800-052-1005
Guatemala
Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico)
1-800-999-5252
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-882-1112
Panama
To contact the Customer Assistance
Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
00-800-052-0001
Dominican Republic
Overseas
1-888-751-5301
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
El Salvador
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: [email protected].
800-6273
Honduras
800-0122-6101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-6
Customer Information
.
Cadillac dealer locator for
service nationwide.
Here are a few of the valuable
tools and services you will have
access to:
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users (U.S. and Canada)
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance
Center. Any TTY user can
.
.
Exclusive privileges and offers.
.
My Showroom: Find and save
Recall notices for your specific
vehicle.
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
.
OnStar and GM Cardmember
Services Earnings summaries.
.
My Dealers: Save details such
as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
communicate with Cadillac by
dialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
.
My Driveway: Access quick
Cadillac Merchandise —
www.cadillaccollection.com
links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
values, or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
Online Owner Center
.
Cadillac Owner Center (U.S.)
www.cadillacownercenter.com
FAQ (Frequently Asked
Questions)
.
.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Contact Us
Information and services
customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient
place.
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca
section within www.gm.ca.
password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
.
Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more.
.
Storage for online service and
maintenance records.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-7
.
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
(U.S. and Canada)
.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Description of the problem.
Roadside Service (U.S.
and Canada)
Coverage
Services are provided up to
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),
whichever comes first.
In the United States or Canada, call
1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only,
call 1-888-889-2438.
This program is available to
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Service
Roadside Service is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Service program at
any time without notification.
When calling Roadside Service,
have the following information
ready:
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
.
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number.
.
Telephone number of your
location.
.
Location of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-8
Customer Information
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to
change a flat tire with spare tire.
The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is your
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is
not covered by the warranty.
Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right
to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
Cadillac's exceptional Roadside
Service is more than an auto club
or towing service. It provides every
Cadillac owner in the United States
with the advantage of contacting
a Cadillac advisor and, where
available, a Cadillac trained dealer
technician who can provide on-site
service.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:
Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed
maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. Additional
travel information is also
A dealer technician will travel to
your location within a 30 mile
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service to
radius of a participating Cadillac
dealership. If beyond this radius, we
will arrange to have your car towed
to the nearest Cadillac dealership.
Each technician travels with a
specially equipped service vehicle
complete with the necessary
unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
available. Allow three weeks
for delivery.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits
and Service: If your trip is
interrupted due to a warranty
failure, incidental expenses
may be reimbursed during the
5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)
Powertrain warranty period.
Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
before this service is given.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public
Cadillac parts and tools required to
handle most roadside repairs.
Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-9
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Service: Pre-authorization,
original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders are
required. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside
Service advisor will help you
make arrangements and explain
how to receive payment.
Services Not Included in
Roadside Service
Roadside Service
(Mexico)
Roadside Service is available
24 hours a day, 365 days of
the year.
.
Impound towing caused by
violation of any laws.
.
Legal fines.
.
Mounting, dismounting,
For detailed information about
Roadside Service, please
see the brochure provided with
your new vehicle or visit our
website at: www.cadillac.com.mx.
Navigate the site and click on
“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mail
correspondence should be sent
to: [email protected].
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Service advisor may give
you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original
.
Towing or services for vehicles
driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to
Canadian‐Purchased Vehicles
.
To contact Roadside Service by
phone, use the following numbers:
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement
is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
receipt to Roadside Service.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
Mexico
01-800-466-0805
United States
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
registration is required.
1-866-466-8906
Canada
.
Trip Routing Service: Limit of
six requests per year.
1-800-268-6800
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-10
Customer Information
Transportation Options
Scheduling Service
Appointments (U.S. and
Canada)
When the vehicle requires warranty
service, contact the dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, the
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation
Program (U.S. and
Canada)
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable
to wait, GM helps to minimize
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending
on the circumstances, the dealer
can offer one of the following:
To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
hybrid‐specific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of the dealer's area.
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call the
dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
Several Courtesy Transportation
options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same day-repair.
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead
of the dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-11
original receipts and can only
be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service.
In addition, for U.S. customers,
should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original
receipts. See the dealer for
requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Collision Damage Repair
(U.S. and Canada)
If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program
Information
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available
at every dealer. Please contact
the dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
Collision Parts
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local,
and rental vehicle provider
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
requirements. Requirements vary
and may include minimum age
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-12
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice
to maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
There are significant differences in
the quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. The dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
not have been tested for the vehicle.
Insuring The Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-13
.
.
.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
Insurance company and policy
number.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist
on Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may
be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
Choose a reputable repair facility
that uses quality replacement parts.
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
section.
Give only the necessary information
to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
If the airbag has inflated, see What
Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? on page 3‑35.
For emergency towing see
Roadside Service (U.S. and
Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Service (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
If another party's insurance
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed
there. Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
Gather the following information:
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices
as long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
.
Driver name, address, and
telephone number.
.
Driver license number.
.
Owner name, address, and
telephone number.
.
.
Vehicle license plate number.
Vehicle make, model, and
model year.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-14
Customer Information
Owner Information
Current and Past Models
Service Publications
Ordering Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions
to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
Or write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
Prices are subject to change
without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
13-15
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Reporting Safety
Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
http://www.safercar.gov.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-16
Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects
to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
like this, notify General Motors.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
This GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, the vehicle uses
This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help the dealer technician
service the vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,
or write:
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
.
How various systems in the
vehicle were operating.
.
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
.
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal.
.
How fast the vehicle was
traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
OnStar®
13-17
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
GM will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crash‐like situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit,
Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data
required by law. Data that GM
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or
may be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13-18
Customer Information
Navigation System
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
personal information.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-1
Airbag System (cont.)
What Will You See After
Antilock Brake
A
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Appearance Care
Accessories and
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-35
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-32
Airbags
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
What Makes an Airbag
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Audio System
Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . .7-29
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Automatic
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-26
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Shift Lock Control
Adding Equipment to the
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-18
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Alarm System
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Antenna
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Anti-Theft
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-43
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 10-38
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
License Plate
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Carbon Monoxide
B
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cargo
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Cargo Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Central Door Unlock System . . . 2-17
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Charging
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Exterior Lighting Battery
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Boost Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv
Capacities and
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-33
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
Lower Anchors and
Competitive Driving Mode . . . . . 9-39
Compressor Kit, Tire
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-14
Customer Satisfaction
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Engine Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Covers
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-53
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59, 3-61
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-117
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-11
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . .10-106
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Competitive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-11
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-16
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Door
Driving for Better Fuel
Engine
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Central Door Unlocking
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Dual Automatic Climate
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Check and Service Engine
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Drive Systems
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-33, 10-31
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Driving
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Coolant Temperature
E
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Electrical System
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Coolant Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-26
Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19
Engine
Compartment
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Competitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7, 9-39
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Fuse Block . . . . .
10-41, 10-45,
10-48, 10-52
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Rear
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . .
10-55, 10-57,
10-59, 10-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Engine Oil
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . .6-5, 10-38
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Front Fog Lamps
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Front Seats
Fuel Economy
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Fuses
Engine
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-16
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Exterior Lighting Battery
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . .
10-41, 10-45,
10-48, 10-52
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Rear
Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . .
10-55, 10-57,
10-59, 10-61
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-49
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-48
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Requirements, California . . . . .9-48
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
F
G
Features
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Gasoline
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-120
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Gauges
Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Gauges (cont.)
Headlamps
Heater
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-73
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
How to Wear Safety Belts
Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High Intensity Discharge
(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-26
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Heated
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-17, 9-18
Ignition Transmission Lock
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Hard Drive Device (HDD) . . . . . . 7-29
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Lamps (cont.)
Exterior Lighting Battery
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Antilock Brake System
Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
License Plate . . . . . . . . 10-38, 10-39
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-19
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
LATCH System
Replacing Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Latch, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Liftgate
Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Lighting
Adaptive Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-22
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Engine Coolant
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-106
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-24
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Traction Control System
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . 2-5, 2-7
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-66
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Lamps
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
Locks
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-19
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-43
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Object Detection System . . . . .5-40
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Messages (cont.)
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Mirrors
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Central Door Unlocking
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-15
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Lower Anchors and Tethers
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
for Children (LATCH
SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
N
M
Navigation
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Net
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Magnetic Ride Control . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Outlets
Passenger Compartment Air
O
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-37
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-22
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14
Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-44
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Operation, Infotainment
P
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34, 9-35
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-33
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-25
Passenger Airbag Status
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Privacy
Rearview Mirrors
Replacing Safety Belt
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-18
Program
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Recommended Fluids and
System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Reporting Safety Defects
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Remote Keyless
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Ride Control Systems
Limited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40
Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Roadside Service . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 2-34
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-18
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rear Axle
Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-44
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6
Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 2-5, 2-7
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-44
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-11
Seats (cont.)
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Spare Tire
S
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-7
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Service
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-29
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-28
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Seats
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speed Limiter, Engine . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-11
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
StabiliTrak®
System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-19
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Easy Entry Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated and Ventilated
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-12
INDEX
Storage Areas
Tires (cont.)
T
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-74
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Sealant and
Compressor Kit,
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96, 10-97
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-85
When It Is Time for New
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Storing the Tire
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Theft-Deterrent
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26, 2-27
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . 3-8
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-75
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . .10-96, 10-97
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 2-34
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-13
Towing
Vehicle Care
Storing the Tire
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . 10-96, 10-97
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Vehicle Identification
U
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-53
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . 10-111
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57, 9-58
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Traction
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-43
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-57
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-38
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-40
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57, 9-58
Transmission
V
W
Vehicle
Warning
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Turn and Lane-Change
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-46
Washer, Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-14
INDEX
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-51
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|